Subaru 2024 Ascent Limited 8‑Passenger User Manual

(1,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 25

Foreword

SFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this

manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its

operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such

as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the

SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU

CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next

owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

“SUBARU” and the six–star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

(2,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 25

(3,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 25

Vehicle types

SFWAB

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

(2,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

(3,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S00

Warranties

S00AA

& Warranties for U.S.A.

S00AA01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of

America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Sys-

tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

S00AA05

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada

S00AA06

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

S00AB

& Using your Owner’s Manual

S00AB01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-

bags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and how

to use the instruments and other switches.

– CONTINUED –

(4,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio

system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need to

take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

For EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle

shown in the illustrations may differ from

your vehicle in terms of equipment.

& Safety warnings

S00AB02

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to you

or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions about how to make better use of

your vehicle.

(5,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Safety symbol

S00AB03

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation list

S00AB04

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

ABS Anti-lock brake system

A/C Air conditioner

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA

Blind Spot Detection/Rear

Cross Traffic Alert

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

INT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking

RON Research octane number

SRH

Steering Responsive Head-

light

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

(6,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Vehicle symbols

S00AC

These are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” �P24.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-

fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric

acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety precautions when

driving

S00AD

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

S00AD01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not replace the safety ben-

efits of wearing a seatbelt. Used

in combination with the seat-

belts, the SRS airbag offers vehi-

cle occupants the best possible

protection in the event of a ser-

ious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated

in the proper upright position

when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment,

the driver should always sit up-

right and well back in the seat as

far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” �P52.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)” �P85.

(7,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Child safety

S00AD02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, infants

and small children should always

be seated in the REAR seat in an

infant or child restraint system

which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. If

a child is too big for a child

restraint system, the child should

sit in the REAR seat and be

restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seating

positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Seat children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint system or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR

DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Child

safety locks” �P147.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows” �P147.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

temperature in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

. In models with power rear gate,

when it operates, the rear gate

moves with remarkable force. It is

possible to be injured if anyone is

caught in or hit by the rear gate so

be sure to obey the following

cautions.

– Check that there are no chil-

dren around the rear gate

before operating the power

rear gate.

– Do not allow children to oper-

ate the power rear gate.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” �P52.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems” �P67.

– CONTINUED –

(8,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag)” �P85.

. For the power rear gate, refer to “Power

rear gate” �P151.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

S00AD03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a lengthy time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

S00AD04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction time

and impairs your perception, judg-

ment and attentiveness. If you drive

after drinking – even if you drink just

a little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects

all people differently, you may have con-

sumed too much alcohol to drive safely

even if the level of alcohol in your blood is

below the legal limit. The safest thing you

can do is never drink and drive. However if

you have no choice but to drive, stop

drinking and sober up completely before

getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

S00AD05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fatal

accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

(9,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

S00AD06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction time will be delayed and

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness will be impaired. If you

drive when tired or sleepy, your,

your passengers’ and other per-

sons’ chances of being involved in

a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead

find a safe place to rest if you are tired or

sleepy. On long trips, you should make

periodic rest stops to refresh yourself

before continuing on your journey. When

possible, you should share the driving with

others.

& Modification of your vehicle

S00AD07

WARNING

Do not remove the genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system.

Doing so could cause the following

functions to be inoperable.

. Combination meter display (color

LCD)

. Rear view image and help lines

. Vehicle settings

. Front and rear climate control

. Front seat heater and ventilation

. Clock

. Surround View Monitor

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Use of cell phones/texting

and driving

S00AD16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and lead to an

accident. If you use a cell phone to

talk or text, first pull off the road and

park in a safe place. In some States/

Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on

a phone while driving, but only if the

phone is hands-free.

& Driving vehicles equipped

with navigation system

S00AD09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving could

lead to an accident. If you wish to

operate the controls of the naviga-

– CONTINUED –

(10,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

tion system, first take the vehicle off

the road and stop it in a safe

location.

& Driving with pets

S00AD10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can be

hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling harness

which can be secured to the rear seat with

a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a

seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the

front passenger’s seat. For further infor-

mation, consult your veterinarian, local

animal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire pressures

S00AD11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month and

before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. For detailed

information, refer to “Tires and wheels”

�P501.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly be-

come hot. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread

separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& On-road and off-road driving

S00AD13

This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

Your vehicle has a higher ground clear-

ance and higher center of gravity, making it

more likely to roll over than ordinary

passenger cars. It also handles and

maneuvers differently from other passen-

ger cars. For this reason, please read

carefully the following section and follow

the instructions and precautions in order to

prevent serious injury or death due to loss

of control, rollover and other accidents.

Refer to “On-road and off-road driving”

�P426.

& Attaching accessories

S00AD15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

. Do not connect any unauthorized

accessories or devices to the

data link connector (OBDII port).

This connector should be used

only with compatible diagnostic

devices for inspection and main-

tenance by an authorized service

technician using authorized ser-

vice tools. Connecting unauthor-

ized devices, such as a driver-

behavior tracking device, may

(11,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

adversely affect vehicle systems,

including safety systems, or al-

low others to access information

stored in your vehicle. The use of

unauthorized devices may also

cause unexpected malfunctions,

such as a drained battery, or may

damage vehicle systems. The

manufacturer’s warranty will not

cover any part that malfunctions,

fails, or is damaged due to the

use of an unauthorized device

with the data link connector.

General information

S00AK

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

S00AK03

Certain vehicle components, such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries, may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the vehicle

S00AK01

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction. This

noise is caused by the operation of the

fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-

tem and the operation is normal. The

noise will stop after approximately 15

minutes.

& Event data recorder

S00AK04

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

– CONTINUED –

(12,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

(1,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

Index

(14,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Illustrated index

S00AE

& Exterior

S00AE01

1 Engine hood (page 489)

2 Front wipers (page 246)

3 Headlights (page 234)

4 Replacing bulbs (page 517)

5 Moonroof (page 159)

6 Roof rails (page 435)

7 Outside mirrors (page 273)

8 Door locks (page 139)

9 Tire pressure (page 504)

10 Flat tires (page 458)

11 Snow tires (page 431)

12 Fog lights (page 242)

13 Towing hook (page 466)

14 Tie-down hooks (page 466)

(15,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Rear window defogger (page 276)

2 Fuel filler lid and cap (page 342)

3 Child safety locks (page 147)

4 Tie-down hole (page 466)

5 Replacing bulbs (page 519)

6 Trailer hitch (page 438)

7 Rear gate (page 150)

8 Towing hook (page 466)

9 Rear window wiper (page 249)

– CONTINUED –

(16,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Interior

S00AE02

! Passenger compartment area

S00AE0201

! Second-row captain seat models

S00AE020101

1 Seatbelts (page 52)

2 Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 78)

3 Front seats (page 30)

4 Second-row seats (page 39)

5 Third-row seats (page 43)

(17,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Second-row bench seat models

S00AE020102

1 Seatbelts (page 52)

2 Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 78)

3 Front seats (page 30)

4 Second-row seats (page 39)

5 Third-row seats (page 43)

– CONTINUED –

(18,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Power windows switches (page 147)

2 Door locks (page 141)

3 Remote control mirror switch (page 273)

4 Select lever (page 361)

5 View monitor switch (page 324)

6 12 V power outlet (page 314)

7 USB power supply (page 316)

8 Glove box (page 311)

9 Cup holder (page 312)

10 Center console (page 312)

(19,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Map light switches (page 306)

2 Moonroof switch (page 160)

3 Sunshade switch (page 159)

4 Door interlock switch (page 306)

5 Button for SUBARU STARLINK

6 Center Information Display (CID) (page

204)/Climate control (page 284)/Audio*/

Navigation system*

7 Electronic parking brake switch (page

378)

8 120 V power outlet (page 315)

9 Rear climate control panel (page 287)

10 USB power supply (page 316)

11 Cup holder (page 312)

*: For details about how to use the audio and

navigation system, refer to the separate

navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for SUBARU STARLINK.

– CONTINUED –

(20,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Instrument panel

S00AE03

1 Seat position memory switch (page 35)

2 Power rear gate switch (page 151)

3 One-touch Interior Illumination switch

(page 308)

4 Illumination brightness control dial (page

173)

5 Combination meter (page 170)

6 Hazard warning flasher switch (page

170)

7 Camera for Driver Monitoring System

(page 407)

8 Tilt/Telescopic steering wheel (page 277)

9 Fuse box (page 516)

10 Hood release knob (page 489)

NOTE

About the EyeSight system: Refer to

the Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

(21,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Steering wheel

S00AE09

1 Audio control switch*

2 Talk switch for voice command system*

3 Cruise control switches*

4 Shift paddles (page 363)

5 Heated Steering Wheel switch (page

278)

6 SRS airbag (page 85)

7 Horn (page 279)

8 Hands-free phone switch*

9 Control switches for combination meter

display (color LCD) (page 197)

*1: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

*2: For details about how to use the switches,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –

(22,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

S00AE04

1 Windshield wiper (page 244)

2 Mist (page 246)

3 Windshield washer (page 248)

4 Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 249)

5 Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 248)/Sensor sensitivity control

(page 247)

6 Windshield wiper and washer switches

(page 246)

7 Light control switch (page 234)

8 Fog light switch (page 242)

9 Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 234)

10 Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 237)

11 Turn signal lever (page 243)

(23,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Combination meter

S00AE05

! U.S.-spec. models

S00AE0549

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be

slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1 Tachometer (page 170)

2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page

193)

3 Combination meter display (page 196)

4 Trip meter and odometer (page 171)

5 Speedometer (page 170)

6 Fuel gauge (page 172)

7 Digital speed screen (page 201)

8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

172)

– CONTINUED –

(24,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Except U.S.-spec. models

S00AE0519

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be

slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1 Tachometer (page 170)

2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page

193)

3 Combination meter display (page 196)

4 Trip meter and odometer (page 171)

5 Speedometer (page 170)

6 Fuel gauge (page 172)

7 Digital speed screen (page 201)

8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page

172)

(25,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

– CONTINUED –

(26,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Warning and indicator lights

S00AE06

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 175

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

175

Rear seatbelt warning

light

176

SRS airbag system

warning light

177

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON indi-

cator light

178

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator light

178

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Malfunc-

tion indicator light

178

Charge warning light 179

Oil pressure warning

light

179

Engine low oil level

warning light

180

AT OIL TEMP warning

light

180

Mark Name Page

Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light (if equipped)

180

ABS warning light 182

Brake system warning

light

183

Electronic parking

brake indicator light

183

Door open warning

light

185

AWD warning light 185

Power steering warn-

ing light

185

Auto Vehicle Hold in-

dicator light

185

Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light

186

Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator

light

187

Mark Name Page

Turn signal indicator

lights

193

LED headlight warning

light

193

High beam indicator

light

193

High beam assist indi-

cator light

193

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

193

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indica-

tor light

193

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

194

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

194

Access key warning

indicator (if equipped)

188

Security indicator light 192

Headlight indicator

light

194

(27,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Mark Name Page

X-MODE indicator 194

Hill descent control in-

dicator

194

Low fuel warning light 185

Low tire pressure

warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)

181

Windshield washer

fluid warning light

180

BSD/RCTA warning

indicator (if equipped)

194

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

194

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

195

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

195

Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF indicator

196

Mark Name Page

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

195

One-touch Interior Illu-

mination indicator (if

equipped)

196

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator

light (green) (if

equipped)

195

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem warning light (yel-

low) (if equipped)

195

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

195

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

196

(28,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Function settings

S00AF

& Function settings and adjustments on the center information display

S00AF07

Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to

“Center information display (CID)” �P204.

& Individual settings and adjustments excluding center information display

S00AF08

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 146

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

137

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

S00AF03

Item Function Available settings

Factory default

setting

Alarm system

Monitoring start delay time (after closing

doors)

0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light

illumination

ON/OFF OFF

Keyless access with push-button Audible signal volume*

Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume*

Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Remote power rear gate open func-

tion*

Operation of power rear gate opening by

remote transmitter/access key fob

Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing

and holding

Pressing and holding

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto dimmer cancel

Sensitivity of the operation of the auto

dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

(29,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item Function Available settings

Factory default

setting

High beam assist function*

High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper*

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper op-

eration

Operation/Non-operation

U.S.-spec. models:

Non-operation

Other models: Op-

eration

*1: If equipped

*2: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

(30,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(31,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S01

1-1. Seats .................................................................. 30

Safety tips ............................................................30

Manual seat (if equipped)......................................33

Power seat (if equipped) .......................................34

Second-row seats .................................................39

Third-row seats ....................................................43

Head restraints .....................................................47

1-2. Seat heater (if equipped).................................. 50

Front seat heater ..................................................51

Second-row seat heater ........................................51

1-3. Seat ventilation (if equipped)........................... 52

1-4. Seatbelts............................................................ 52

Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................52

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................54

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ...........................................54

Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................55

Passengers seatbelt reminder ...............................55

Fastening the seatbelt ..........................................55

Seatbelt maintenance............................................61

1-5. Seatbelt extender.............................................. 61

1-6. Seatbelt pretensioners ..................................... 63

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt

pretensioners .....................................................64

Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ...............65

System monitors ..................................................65

System servicing ..................................................65

Precautions against vehicle modification ..............66

1-7. Rear seat reminder ........................................... 67

1-8. Child restraint systems.................................... 67

Safety precautions ...............................................67

Safety tips for installing child restraint

systems .............................................................69

Where to place a child restraint system ................69

Choosing a child restraint system ........................72

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR

seatbelt..............................................................72

Installing a booster seat or booster cushion .........77

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................78

Tether anchorages ...............................................83

1-9. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) ............................................... 85

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system...............................................................85

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system for accessories and any objects .............87

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system and children...........................................89

Components ........................................................92

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system .............94

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............. 105

SRS airbag system monitors .............................. 112

SRS airbag system servicing.............................. 113

Precautions against vehicle modification............ 114

How to contact the vehicle manufacturer

concerning modifications for persons with

disabilities that may affect the advanced

airbag system .................................................. 115

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(32,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1-1. Seats

S01AQ

& Safety tips

S01AQ01

! Safety tips for seat

S01AQ0101

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing, as personal injury or loss of

vehicle control may occur.

. Before adjusting the seat, ensure

nothing is blocking the adjusting

mechanism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it

back and forth to ensure the seat

is securely locked. If it is not, it

may move suddenly or the seat-

belt may not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with the

front seat locking mechanism

and cause an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

back and upright in the seat. To

reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should always

be used in the upright position

while the vehicle is running. If the

front seatbacks are not in the

upright position and a collision

occurs, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are not seated

in the proper upright position

when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment,

the driver should always sit up-

right and well back in the seat as

far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control, and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child re-

straint systems and those that have

outgrown child restraint devices) sit

in the REAR seat properly restrained

at all times in a child restraint

system or in a seatbelt, whichever

Seats

(33,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

is appropriate for the child’s age,

height and weight. Secure ALL types

of child restraint systems (including

forward facing child seats) in the

REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-

STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” �P67.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the seat-

back. If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may interfere

with the proper operation of the

following systems and could result

in serious injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. Seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

. Seat ventilation (if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(34,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

Do not press your feet or legs into

the instrument panel. Doing so may

prevent the occupant detection

function of the SRS airbag system

and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag from functioning correctly.

This may result in serious injury or

death in the event of an accident.

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits back

and upright in the seat. Do not place

cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. By doing so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

as it could tumble forward and injure

passengers in the event of a sudden

stop or accident.

! Safety tips for head restraint

S01AQ0102

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints the opposite

Seats

(35,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

way round. Doing so will prevent

the head restraints from function-

ing as intended. Therefore, when

you remove the head restraints,

you must reinstall all head re-

straints correctly to protect vehi-

cle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

& Manual seat (if equipped)

S01AQ05

! Forward and backward adjustment

S01AQ0501

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and try to move the seat back and

forth to make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

! Reclining the seatback

S01AQ0502

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

the lever is pulled. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(36,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Seat height adjustment (driver’s

seat)

S01AQ0503

1 When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

2 When the lever is pulled up, the seat

rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and

down.

& Power seat (if equipped)

S01AQ06

! Driver’s seat

S01AQ0601

1 Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion angle or seat cushion

height.

2 Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

3 Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

4 Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

5 Lumbar support control switch (if

equipped)

To increase lower back support, push the

front side of the switch.

To decrease lower back support, push

the rear side of the switch.

To adjust the lumbar support height, push

the upper or lower side of the switch.

Seats

(37,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Thigh extension (driver’s seat – if

equipped)

S01AQ0604

CAUTION

When the thigh extension is pulled

out to its fullest, do not put weight on

the top of it. Doing so could break

the part.

The seat front length can be adjusted.

Pull up the lever “1” to adjust the length

and release the lever to lock it.

! Front passenger’s seat

S01AQ0602

1 Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward.

2 Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

! Power driver’s seat with synchro-

nized outside mirrors memory

function (if equipped)

S01AQ0603

WARNING

. To avoid loss of vehicle control or

personal injury, never perform

the following operations while

driving.

– Adjusting the seat

– Selecting a registered seat

position

. Before adjusting the seat or se-

lecting a registered seat position,

make sure that cargo or the

hands and feet of rear seat pas-

sengers are clear of the adjusting

mechanism.

. The memory adjustment of the

seat position is finished. Be sure

to confirm that the select lever is

in the “P” position, and the park-

ing brake is applied, when adjust-

ing the seat position. Do not drive

until the utilizing of the seat

position is complete.

. When any unusual conditions or

malfunctions occur during the

memory adjustment of the seat

position, stop the memory ad-

justment of the seat position by

performing any of the following

procedures.

– Operate any of the power seat

switches.

– Press the “SET” button.

– Press button “1” or “2”.

– Operate the outside mirror

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(38,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

control switch.

“2” or each of the key fobs.

The following memory positions can be

registered.

. Forward/backward position of the seat

. Angle of the seatback

. Angle of the seat cushion

. Height of the seat

. Angle of the outside mirrors

. Angle of the outside mirror angle on the

passenger’s side when the reverse tilt-

down operates.

NOTE

The seat position can also be retrieved

with the Driver Monitoring System user

information. To do so, perform user

registration in the Driver Monitoring

System settings. Refer to “Driver Mon-

itoring System” �P225.

! Registration of memory position

with button “1” or “2”

S01AQ060301

1. Adjust the seat and outside mirror

positions under the following condi-

tions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

2. Register the adjusted positions by

either of the following procedures.

. Press the “SET” button, then press

either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds

within 5 seconds.

. While pressing and holding the

“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”

until a chirp sounds within 5 sec-

onds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seat

position and outside mirror angle on the

passenger’s side will be registered.

NOTE

If a new position is registered for the

same button, the previously registered

memory position is deleted.

! Registration of the reverse tilt-

down mirror angle with button

“1” or “2”

S01AQ060306

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when re-

gistering the reverse tilt-down mir-

ror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the “R”

position, then the outside mirror angle

on the passenger’s side will move to

the reverse tilt-down position.

2. Adjust the outside mirror angle on the

passenger’s side. For details about the

settings, refer to “Remote control mir-

ror switch” �P273.

3. Move the select lever to the “P”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will return to its original position.

4. Register the adjusted positions by

either of the following procedures.

. Press the “SET” button, then press

either “1” or “2” until a chirp sounds

within 5 seconds.

. While pressing and holding the

“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”

until a chirp sounds within 5 sec-

onds.

Seats

(39,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

A chirp will sound once, and the seat

position and outside mirror angle on the

passenger’s side will be registered.

NOTE

. The outside mirror angle will return

to its original position approxi-

mately 9 seconds after the select

lever is moved to any position other

than “R” position.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as the front

passenger’s side mirror. The setting

of the driver’s side mirror operation

can be changed by a SUBARU deal-

er. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

! Registration of memory position

with an access key fob (if

equipped)

S01AQ060302

1. Adjust the memory position under the

following conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

2. Hold the access key fob and press and

hold the “SET” button. Then press the

“

” button of the access key fob.

A chirp will sound once, and the memory

position is registered.

NOTE

When registering the seat position,

carry the access key that you want to

or more access keys, registration may

not be possible.

! Registration of the reverse tilt-

down mirror angle with the key

fob

S01AQ060307

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when re-

gistering the reverse tilt-down mir-

ror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the “R”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will move to the reverse tilt-down

position.

2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For

details about the settings, refer to

“Remote control mirror switch” �P273.

3. Move the select lever to the “P”

position, then the outside mirror angle

will return to its original position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”/

“LOCK” position.

5. Hold the access key fob and press and

hold the “SET” button, then press the

“

” button of the access key fob.

A chirp will sound once, and the reverse

tilt-down mirror angle will be registered.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(40,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. The outside mirror angle will return

to its original position approxi-

mately 9 seconds after the select

lever is moved to any position other

than “R” position.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as the front

passenger’s side mirror. The setting

of the driver’s side mirror operation

can be changed by a SUBARU deal-

er. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

. The system stores the adjusted

mirror angle for approximately 45

seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” position. Regis-

ter the mirror angle while the mem-

ory function is available.

! Utilizing of memory position

registered with button “1” or “2”

S01AQ060303

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button

to retrieve your registered memory

position. If the seat position is not

optimum for you, it may adversely

affect your driving and may reduce

the effectiveness of the seatbelt.

That could result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Put the select lever is in the “P” position

and apply the parking brake. Then

press button “1” or “2”.

A chirp will sound and the seat and angle

of the outside mirrors moves to the

registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the “R”

position, the outside mirror will move to the

registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

. If the vehicle battery is removed, the

registered memory position data will

not be deleted.

. When the button “1” or “2” is

pressed within 45 seconds after the

driver’s door is opened, the regis-

tered memory position can be re-

trieved even if the ignition switch is

in the “LOCK” or “OFF” position.

. If buttons “1” and “2” are pressed at

the same time, execution of seat

position retrieval may not be possi-

ble.

. When the retrieved position is the

same as the current seat position, a

chirp will sound twice.

! Utilizing of the seat position

registered with access key fob

S01AQ060304

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing

the “

” button or gripping the door

Seats

(41,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

handle.

3. Open the driver’s door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the

registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the “R”

position, the outside mirror will move to the

registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

. If the registered seat position cannot

be retrieved after performing the

previous procedures, try the follow-

ing procedures.

(1) Press the “SET” button on the

driver’s door.

(2) Press the “

” button on the

access key fob or touch the

door lock sensor to lock the

doors.

(3) Perform the prior procedures

again.

. If the keyless access function is

disabled, the seat position cannot

be retrieved by gripping the driver’s

door handle. However, the seat posi-

tion can still be retrieved by pressing

the “

” button on the access key

fob. For information about how to

enable/disable the keyless access

function, refer to “Disabling keyless

access function” �P129.

. If a new position is registered for the

same access key fob, the previously

registered seat position is deleted.

. If you are carrying 2 or more access

keys, seat position retrieval may not

be possible.

! Clearing the registered seat posi-

tion with access key fob

S01AQ060305

1. Close the driver’s door.

2. While holding the access key fob and

pressing the “SET” button, press the

“

” button on the access key fob.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seat

position will be cleared.

NOTE

After deleting the seat position, wait for

a few moments before registering a

new seat position.

& Second-row seats

S01AQ07

WARNING

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

back and upright in the seat. Do

not place cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

By doing so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious injury or death.

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing. Doing so is dangerous as the

seat could move rapidly and you

could be injured.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(42,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of the

third-row seat passengers are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. After adjusting the seat, move it

back and forth to make sure it is

securely locked. If the seat is not

securely locked, it may move or

the seatbelt may not operate

properly.

. Do not put objects under the

second-row seats. They may in-

terfere with the seat locking and

cause an accident.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

as it could tumble forward and injure

passengers in the event of a sudden

stop or accident.

! Forward and backward adjustment

S01AQ0701

Captain seat

Bench seat

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position.

! Reclining the seatback

S01AQ0702

Seats

(43,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the seat-

back. If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

CAUTION

. Never allow the third-row seat

passengers to adjust the seat-

back of the second row. Doing so

is dangerous as the seatback will

tilt rapidly and could injure the

passengers.

. If the cargo area cover is

equipped, be careful not to pinch

your hand between the headrest

and the cargo area cover when

you recline the seatback.

Captain seat

Bench seat

Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback to

the desired position.

Then release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

! Folding down the seatback

S01AQ0703

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury or death.

. Secure skis and other long items

properly to prevent them from

being thrown around inside the

vehicle and causing serious in-

jury during a sudden stop, steer-

ing maneuver or acceleration.

. If passengers are sitting on the

third-row seat, never drive while

folding the second-row seat. It

can be a serious interference at

the time of braking and impact.

. If passengers are sitting on the

third-row seat, never drive while

the center seatback of the sec-

ond-row seat is folded. Doing so

may result in serious injury in the

event of hard braking or an

impact.

. When you return the seatback to

its original position, shake it

slightly to confirm that it is se-

curely in place. If it is not securely

fixed in place, it may suddenly

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(44,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

fold down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out

from the cargo area. Both could

cause serious injury or death.

. After returning the seatback to its

original position, be sure to place

all of the seatbelts and the tab

attached to the seat cushion

above the seat cushion. Also,

make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

1. Store the armrest.

2. Store the seatbelt buckle.

1 Holder

3. Store the window-side seatbelt in the

holder to prevent it from being da-

maged. When using it, pull it out from

the holder.

4. Lower the headrest to the storage

position. Refer to “Head restraints”

�P47.

5. Pull the lever and tilt the seatback

forward.

6. Pull the lever to unlock the seatback.

The seatback will be folded down.

7. Slide the folded second seats back-

ward until they lock.

8. To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it

locks into place. Make sure it is

securely locked.

! Armrest

S01AQ0704

WARNING

Do not hook the seatbelt onto the

armrest when the seatbelt is fas-

tened. The seatbelt may be unable to

fulfill its intended function in the

event of an accident, possibly re-

sulting in serious injury.

Seats

(45,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Captain seat

S01AQ070401

Lower the armrest to use it.

To lower the armrest position:

First lift it all the way to the top position,

then lower it to the bottom position.

To raise the armrest position:

Lift the armrest from the bottom position to

the desired height.

! Bench seat

S01AQ070402

To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest’s

top edge.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers

must never sit on the center armrest

while the vehicle is in motion.

& Third-row seats

S01AQ08

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits back

and upright in the seat. Do not place

cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. By doing so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious injury or death.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(46,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback,

as it could tumble forward and injure

passengers in the event of a sudden

stop or accident.

! Third-row seats

S01AQ0805

Pull the strap up and adjust the seatback to

the desired position. Then release the

strap and make sure the seatback is

securely locked into place.

! Access to the third-row seats

S01AQ0801

There are levers on both window sides of

the second-row seat. Each lever is used to

facilitate access to the third-row seat.

WARNING

In its slid-forward position with the

seatback tipped forward, the sec-

ond-row seat is not locked and is

free to move. Do not drive the

vehicle with the seat in this state or

allow anyone to sit on the seat

unless it is completely locked. Doing

so may result in serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

When getting into or out of the third-

row seat, make sure the second-row

seat is in the completely slid-for-

ward position and be sure to watch

your step.

! To access the third-row seat

S01AQ0802

Captain seat

Seats

(47,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Bench seat

Fold the seatback forward and slide the

seat toward the front.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/

aft position of the second-row seat, raise

the seatback, and make sure the seatback

is securely locked in position.

! To get out from the third-row seat

S01AQ0803

Captain seat

Bench seat

Raise the lever from the third-row seat.

The seatback of the second-row seat will

tip forward and the seat will slide forward.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/

aft position of the second-row seat, raise

the seatback, and make sure the seatback

is securely locked in position.

! Folding down the seatback

S01AQ0804

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury or death.

. Secure skis and other long items

properly to prevent them from

being thrown around inside the

vehicle and causing serious in-

jury during a sudden stop, steer-

ing maneuver or acceleration.

. When you return the seatback to

its original position, shake it

slightly to confirm that it is se-

curely in place. If it is not securely

fixed in place, it may suddenly

fold down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out

from the cargo area. Both could

cause serious injury or death.

. After returning the seatback to its

original position, be sure to place

all of the seatbelts and the tab

attached to the seat cushion

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(48,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

above the seat cushion. Also,

make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

1. Store the seatbelt buckle.

1 Holder

2. Store the window-side seatbelt in the

holder to prevent it from being da-

maged. When using it, pull it out from

the holder.

3. Lower the headrest to the storage

position. Refer to “Head restraints”

�P47.

4. While pulling the straps, fold down the

seatbacks.

From inside

From outside

5. When returning the seatbacks to their

original positions, either press up on

the seatbacks from inside the vehicle,

or from outside the vehicle pull up on

the strap located on the back of the

seatback. Lift the seat up securely until

it locks in place.

Seats

(49,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Head restraints

S01AQ04

WARNING

Do not change the head restraint to

the head restraint from a different

seat. The head restraints were each

designed specifically for the front

seat, second-row seat, and third-row

seat.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of the

front seat head restraints only. When

installing the front seat head restraints,

make sure that the angle of the head

restraints can be adjusted.

! Front seats

S01AQ0401

Both the driver’s seat and the front

passenger’s seat are equipped with head

restraints. Both head restraints are adjus-

table in the following ways.

! Height adjustment

S01AQ040101

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(50,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Angle adjustment

S01AQ040102

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

! Second-row seats

S01AQ0403

Head restraints are installed in all second-

row seats, and can be adjusted as follow-

ing.

! Window side seating position

S01AQ040301

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

Seats

(51,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Applicable only for eight seaters

S01AQ040303

1 When not used (retracted position)

2 When used (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used in the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the second-row center seating

position is occupied, raise the head re-

straint to the extended position. When the

second-row center seating position is not

occupied, lower the head restraint to

improve rearward visibility.

! Third-row seats

S01AQ0404

Head restraints are installed in all third-row

seats, and can be adjusted as described

below.

1 When not used (retracted position)

2 When used (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used in the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

– CONTINUED –

Seats

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(52,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the upper of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

When the third-row seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the third-row

seating position is not occupied, lower

the head restraint to improve rearward

visibility.

1-2. Seat heater (if equipped)

S01AB

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

CAUTION

. Do not put hard or heavy objects

or ones with protrusions on the

seat, and do not stab the seat

with sharp objects, such as pins

or needles.

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

more from the completely closed

position.

! Deactivation of the memory func-

tion

S02AJ010103

Deactivate the memory function to open

the rear gate fully. Perform either of the

following operation to deactivate the mem-

ory function.

– Deactivate the “Power Rear Gate

Memory” function on the center infor-

mation display. Refer to “Car settings”

�P218.

– Register the position of the rear gate at

the fully open position.

! Utilizing the memorized rear gate

height

S02AJ010102

To open the rear gate and stop it at the

registered height, perform the following

procedure.

1. Check that “Power Rear Gate Memory”

is on. Refer to “Car settings” �P218.

2. Press and hold any of the power rear

gate button.

NOTE

The rear gate will open to the position

that is stored in the memory function

even if the rear gate is opened by the

reverse function.

! Reverse function

S02AJ0102

WARNING

. Do not let parts of your body get

caught when operating the re-

verse function. If the reverse

function does not operate for

some reason, this may lead to

serious injury or accidents.

. The reverse function may not

operate if foreign objects are

caught in the rear gate just before

it closes completely. Be careful

not to catch your fingers and

other body parts.

. The reverse function may not

operate depending on the object

shape and the manner in which it

was caught. Be careful not to

catch your fingers and other

Rear gate

156

(159,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

body parts.

CAUTION

. If the reverse function is operated

3 times consecutively, automatic

opening and closing of the power

rear gate function will be can-

celed and the rear gate will stop

opening or closing suddenly.

However, the rear gate may open

or close depending on the rear

gate height when automatic op-

eration is ceased. Be careful that

the rear gate does not hit any-

one’s head or face, etc. and that

fingers and baggage, etc. are not

caught in it.

. Take care not to damage the

touch sensors. Otherwise, the

reverse function may cease to

operate.

If, while opening or closing using power

rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or

baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic

chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate

will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear

gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear

gate will automatically open.

1 Touch sensors

Touch sensors are attached on the left and

right edges of the rear gate. If the touch

sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc.

while closing by the power rear gate

function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3

times and the rear gate will open auto-

matically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using the

reverse function, it will be opened fully

or to the height registered in the

memory function.

! Rear gate auto closure function

S02AJ0104

If, while fully opened via the power rear

gate function, the rear gate is lowered by

the weight of snow and such, an electronic

chirp will sound and the rear gate auto

closure function will apply braking to the

rear gate so that it prevents a rapid closure

of the rear gate.

NOTE

. If there is snow on the rear gate, only

use the power rear gate function

after removing the snow.

. If you close the rear gate manually

just after the rear gate is fully opened

using the power rear gate function,

the rear gate drop prevention func-

tion will detect a rapid closure of the

rear gate and apply braking to the

rear gate. In this case, this is not a

malfunction.

! Selecting audible signal operation

S02AJ0109

Using an electronic chirp, the power rear

gate will give you an audible signal before

starting its operation. If desired, the audi-

ble signal can be turned off by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, you can turn

the audible signal off by operating the

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate

157

Keys and doors

(160,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P218.

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal

also works as the audible signal settings

for the “remote keyless entry system” and

the “keyless access with push-button start

system”. However, for the warning chime

such as that caused by “Reverse function”

�P156 or “Rear gate auto closure func-

tion” �P157, it cannot be set as non-

operational.

! Initialization of power rear gate

S02AJ0112

If the power rear gate detects some

abnormality while operating, an electronic

chirp will sound and the power rear gate

operation will be automatically stopped in

either opening or closing position. In this

case, the system needs to be initialized in

the following order to restart the function

properly.

! If the power rear gate is closed

S02AJ011201

1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener

switch until it unlocked (for approxi-

mately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear

gate.

2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to

close automatically. The system will be

initialized once the gate is fully closed.

3. Operate the power rear gate and check

that the function operates properly.

! If the power rear gate is opened

S02AJ011202

1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to

close automatically. The system will be

initialized once the gate is fully closed.

If the rear gate will not close comple-

tely, keep pressing the rear gate open-

er button for approximately 5 seconds

and pull down the rear gate.

2. Operate the power rear gate and check

that the function operates properly.

CAUTION

If the power rear gate function does

not operate properly, have your

vehicle checked by SUBARU dealer.

Rear gate

158

(161,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)

S02AK

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside

objects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment function

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

. If the moonroof does not close,

have the system checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Sunshade switch

S02AK09

1 Open

2 Close

To open or close the sunshade using the

automatic function, slide and hold the

switch toward the open/close side and

release.

To stop the sunshade halfway, slide the

sunshade switch either way.

– CONTINUED –

Moonroof

159

Keys and doors

(162,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Moonroof switch

S02AK02

! Tilting moonroof

S02AK0201

To raise or lower the moonroof, press the

moonroof switch.

If the shade is closed past the half-open

position when the switch is pressed, it will

open up to the half-open position.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonroof

has been raised or has been lowered

completely. Pressing the switch con-

tinuously may cause damage to the

moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

S02AK0202

1 Open

2 Close

To open the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and held

to the open side, the moonroof will open,

then stop slightly before the fully open

position to reduce wind noise.

Slide the moonroof switch again to fully

open the moonroof.

To close the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and held

to the close side, the moonroof will close,

then stop at the tilt-up position.

Slide and hold the moonroof switch again

to fully close the moonroof.

To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the

moonroof switch either way.

NOTE

. After washing the vehicle or after it

rains, wipe away water on the roof

prior to opening the moonroof to

prevent drops of water from falling

into the passenger compartment.

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with

the moonroof fully opened.

! Anti-entrapment function

S02AK0203

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

Moonroof

160

(163,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

2-11. Rear door window sun-

shades (if equipped)

S02AT

1 Hook

The rear door window sunshades are built

in the rear door trim.

To use the sunshade, pull it up and hang it

on the hooks.

To retract the sunshade, release it from the

hooks slowly and allow it to roll into the

door trim.

CAUTION

. Do not use the rear door window

sunshade when the window is

opened. There is a risk that the

rear door window sunshade will

come off of the hook.

. To ensure normal operation of the

sunshades, observe the follow-

ing precautions.

– Do not put anything where it

may hinder the opening/clos-

ing of a sunshade.

– Do not put anything on the

sunshades.

– Do not hang anything on the

hook.

Rear door window sunshades

161

Keys and doors

(164,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(165,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S03

3-1. Ignition switch (models without “keyless

access with push-button start system”)..... 166

Key positions .....................................................166

Key reminder chime............................................167

Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................ 167

3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”) ........................................................ 168

Safety precautions.............................................. 168

Operating range for push-button start system .....168

Switching power status.......................................169

When access key fob does not operate

properly............................................................170

3-3. Hazard warning flasher .................................. 170

3-4. Meters and gauges ......................................... 170

Speedometer ...................................................... 170

Tachometer......................................................... 170

Odometer ........................................................... 171

Double trip meter................................................ 171

Fuel gauge .........................................................172

Engine coolant temperature gauge......................172

ECO gauge ......................................................... 173

Combination meter settings ................................ 173

3-5. Illumination brightness control ..................... 173

Auto dimmer cancel function .............................. 174

3-6. Warning and indicator lights ......................... 174

Initial illumination for system check....................174

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 175

SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 177

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicator lights ................................................. 178

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light................................................... 178

Charge warning light .......................................... 179

Oil pressure warning light .................................. 179

Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 180

Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 180

AT OIL TEMP warning light................................. 180

Rear differential oil temperature warning light

(if equipped)..................................................... 180

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.

models)............................................................ 181

ABS warning light .............................................. 182

Brake system warning light ................................ 183

Electronic parking brake indicator light .............. 183

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light ........................ 185

Low fuel warning light........................................ 185

Door open warning light..................................... 185

All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 185

Power steering warning light .............................. 185

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator

light ................................................................. 186

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 187

Warning chimes and warning indicator of

the keyless access with push-button start

system (if equipped)......................................... 188

Security indicator light ....................................... 192

Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 193

Turn signal indicator lights................................. 193

High beam indicator light ................................... 193

High beam assist indicator light ......................... 193

Instruments and controls

(166,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning

light.................................................................. 193

LED headlight warning light ................................193

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator

light.................................................................. 193

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light ......194

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ..........194

Headlight indicator light......................................194

X-MODE indicator ............................................... 194

Hill descent control indicator .............................. 194

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 194

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 194

RAB warning indicator (if equipped).................... 195

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) .........................195

Icy road surface warning indicator ......................195

Driver Monitoring System operation indicator

light (green) (if equipped)..................................195

Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)

(if equipped) ..................................................... 195

Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light

(if equipped) ..................................................... 195

Driver Monitoring System temporary stop

indicator light (if equipped) ............................... 196

One-touch Interior Illumination indicator

(if equipped) ..................................................... 196

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator.....................196

3-7. Combination meter display (color LCD) ....... 196

Basic operation .................................................. 197

Welcome screen (opening animation) and

Good-bye screen (ending animation)................. 197

Warning screen .................................................. 198

Meter information screen.................................... 198

Telltale screen.................................................... 200

Basic screens .................................................... 201

3-8. Center information display (CID) ...................204

Features ............................................................ 204

Welcome screen................................................. 205

Good-bye screen................................................ 205

Interruption screen............................................. 205

Touch screen operations .................................... 205

Display .............................................................. 206

3-9. Clock ................................................................231

Setting the clock manually ................................. 231

Setting the clock automatically........................... 231

Time Zone (models with navigation system) ....... 232

Daylight Saving Time (models with navigation

system)............................................................ 232

3-10. Valet Mode .....................................................233

Activation of Valet Mode..................................... 233

Deactivation of Valet Mode ................................. 233

3-11. Light control switch ......................................234

Headlights ......................................................... 234

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 237

Headlight flasher................................................ 237

High beam assist function.................................. 237

Daytime running light system ............................. 240

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH).........241

3-13. Headlight beam leveler .................................242

3-14. Fog light switch (if equipped) ......................242

3-15. Turn signal lever............................................243

One-touch lane changer ..................................... 244

Instruments and controls

(167,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-16. Wiper and washer......................................... 244

Windshield wiper and washer switches ...............246

Rear window wiper and washer switch................249

3-17. Mirrors ........................................................... 250

Inside mirror (if equipped) ..................................250

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with

HomeLink

(if equipped)....................................250

Smart Rearview Mirror/compass with

HomeLink

(if equipped) ................................... 258

Outside mirrors.................................................. 273

3-18. Defogger and deicer......................................276

3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel.......................277

Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped)....... 278

3-20. Horn................................................................279

Instruments and controls

(168,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-1. Ignition switch (models

without “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

S03AA

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the

vehicle is being driven or towed

because that will lock the steer-

ing wheel, preventing steering

control. And when the engine is

turned off, it takes a much greater

effort than usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure could re-

sult in injury to a child or others.

Children could operate the power

windows, the moonroof or other

controls or even make the vehicle

move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a key

holder or to a large bunch of other

keys, centrifugal force may act on it

as the vehicle moves, resulting in

unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine

is not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in

the “ON” or “ACC” position can

cause the battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the

“ACC” position, turn the steering

wheel slightly to the left and right as

you turn the ignition switch.

& Key positions

S03AA11

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be inserted

or removed in this position.

The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you

remove the key.

ACC

In this position the electrical

accessories (audio, acces-

sory power outlet, etc.) can be

used.

This is the normal operating

position after starting the en-

gine.

START

The engine is started in this

position.

Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)

166

(169,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

NOTE

. To turn the key from the “ACC” to

“LOCK” position, the select lever

must be in the “P” position and the

key must be pushed in and turned.

. If your registered key fails to start

the engine, pull out the key once (the

security indicator light will blink),

and then insert the key again and

turn it to the “START” position again

to restart the engine.

. The engine may not start in the

following cases:

– The key grip is touching another

key or a metallic key holder.

– The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer trans-

ponder.

– The key is near or touching

another transmitter.

& Key reminder chime

S03AA05

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under the following

conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The key is removed from the ignition

switch.

. The driver’s door is closed.

& Ignition switch light (if

equipped)

S03AA06

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when the driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several

tens of seconds and then gradually turns

off under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

– CONTINUED –

Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)

167

Instruments and controls

(170,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The light turns off immediately under the

following conditions.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. All doors and the rear gate are locked

using the remote keyless entry trans-

mitter.

3-2. Push-button ignition

switch (models with “keyless

access with push-button start

system”)

S03BG

& Safety precautions

S03BG04

Refer to “Safety precautions” �P120.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

S03BG01

1 Antennas

2 Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the

antennas inside the vehicle, the

push-button ignition switch and the

engine start cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible

to switch the power or to start the

engine.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places. It may become

impossible to operate the push-

button ignition switch and the en-

gine start. It may also cause a false

warning to issue although no mal-

function actually occurs, or not to

issue a warning when any malfunc-

tion occurs.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the en-

gine, if the access key fob battery is

discharged, perform the procedure

described in “Access key fob – if

access key fob does not operate

properly” �P470. In such a case,

replace the battery immediately. Re-

fer to “Replacing battery of access

key fob” �P522.

Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)

168

(171,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Switching power status

S03BG02

1 Operation indicator

2 Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the

push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Shift the select lever into the “P”/“N”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal.

Every time the button is pressed, the

power is switched in the sequence of

“OFF”, “ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When

the engine is stopped and the push-

button ignition switch is in “ACC” or

“ON”, the operation indicator on the

push-button ignition switch illuminates

in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignition

switch is left in “ON” (while the

engine is not running) or “ACC”

for a long time, it may result in

vehicle battery discharge.

. Do not spill drinks or other liquids

on the push-button ignition

switch. It may cause a malfunc-

tion.

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand soiled

with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not illuminate even when

the instrument panel illumination

is turned on, have the vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. When operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all

the way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in

green when the push-button ignition

switch is pressed, steering is

locked. When this occurs, press the

push-button ignition switch while

turning the steering wheel left and

right.

– CONTINUED –

Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)

169

Instruments and controls

(172,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Battery drainage reduction function

S03BG0201

When the push-button ignition switch is left

in the “ACC” position for approximately 20

minutes or the “ON” position (the engine is

not running) for approximately 1 hour, the

push-button ignition switch will be auto-

matically switched to “OFF” to reduce the

possibility of the battery going dead. (This

function is activated when the select lever

is in the “P” position.)

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

S03BG03

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” �P470.

3-3. Hazard warning flasher

S03AB

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn

other drivers when you have to park your

vehicle under emergency conditions. The

hazard warning flasher works regardless

of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning flasher switch on

the instrument panel. All the turn signal

lights and the turn signal indicator lights

will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the

switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and gauges

S03AD

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the

combination meter use liquid-crystal

displays. You will find their indications

hard to see if you wear polarized

glasses.

& Speedometer

S03AD03

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

& Tachometer

S03AD06

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

Hazard warning flasher

170

(173,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Odometer

S03AD04

1 TRIP RESET switch

2 Combination meter

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up.

The indicators will turn off when:

. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper-

ated for approximately 10 seconds.

. The driver’s door is opened and then

closed.

& Double trip meter

S03AD05

1 TRIP RESET switch

2 Combination meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

TRIP RESET switch.

To reset the trip meter, select either the A

trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the

TRIP RESET switch.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

NOTE

. If the connection between the com-

bination meter and battery is broken

for any reason such as vehicle

maintenance or fuse replacement,

the data recorded on the trip meter

will be lost.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position,

the odometer/trip meter will light up.

It is possible to switch between the A

trip meter and B trip meter indica-

tions while the odometer/trip meter

is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the

trip meter by pressing and holding

the TRIP RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10

– CONTINUED –

Meters and gauges

171

Instruments and controls

(174,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

seconds.

– The driver’s door is opened and

then closed.

& Fuel gauge

S03AD07

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge

shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains

fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to fuel

level movement in the tank (e.g., during

braking, turning or acceleration).

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler lid is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

while the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position,

the fuel gauge will light up and

indicate the amount of fuel remain-

ing in the tank.

The gauge will turn off when the

TRIP RESET switch is not operated

for approximately 10 seconds.

& Engine coolant temperature

gauge

S03AD08

1 Normal operating range

The engine coolant temperature gauge

shows engine coolant temperature when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The engine coolant temperature will vary

in accordance with the outside tempera-

ture and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the engine coolant

temperature gauge reaches near the mid-

dle of the range. Engine operation is

optimum with the engine coolant at this

temperature range and high revving op-

eration when the engine is not warmed up

enough should be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the

vehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine overheating”

�P465.

Meters and gauges

172

(175,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& ECO gauge

S03AD12

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the current rate of fuel consump-

tion and the average rate of fuel consump-

tion since the trip meter was last reset.

If the ECO gauge moves towards the right

side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication of fuel effi-

ciency.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is

not shown until you have driven for 1

mile (or 1 km). Before that time, the

ECO gauge does not operate.

& Combination meter settings

S03AD16

Meter settings can be set on the center

information display. For details, perform

the procedures described in “General

settings” �P213.

3-5. Illumination brightness

control

S03AJ

The illumination brightness of the combi-

nation meter and center information dis-

play dims under the following conditions.

. The light switch is in the “

” or “ ”

position when the ambient light is dark.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

– CONTINUED –

Illumination brightness control

173

Instruments and controls

(176,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the

automatic dimming function does

not work at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch

is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

& Auto dimmer cancel function

S03AJ01

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust

the illumination brightness by using the

control dial. When the ambient light is dark,

you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.

The operational/non-operational setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

3-6. Warning and indicator

lights

S03AE

& Initial illumination for system

check

S03AE29

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned to

the “ON” position. This permits checking

the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, the following lights

illuminate and turn off after several sec-

onds or after the engine has started.

: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt

warning light turns off only when the

driver fastens the seatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warn-

ing light (The seatbelt warning

light turns off only when the front

seat passenger fastens the seat-

belt.)

: Rear seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator light

/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-

spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Low fuel warning light

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

: Electronic parking brake indicator

light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

Warning and indicator lights

174

(177,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

S03AE01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and passen-

ger’s seats, as required by current safety

standards.

! Driver’s and front passenger’s seats

S03AE0114

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver and

front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by

illuminating the warning lights in the loca-

tions indicated in the following illustration

and sounding a chime.

Driver’s seat

Front passenger’s seat

! Operation

S03AE011401

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front

passenger’s warning light will illuminate,

then it will blink for several seconds. If the

seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,

the warning chime may make a peep

sound.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened

while driving, the seatbelt warning

system operates as follows accord-

ing to the vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when driving approximately 4

mph (6 km/h) or less.

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will make a

peep sound when driving be-

tween approximately 4 mph (6

km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The

warning chime will stop when the

vehicle stops.

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound

loudly when 15 seconds have

elapsed while driving between

approximately 4 mph (6 km/h)

and 13 mph (20 km/h).

– The warning light will blink, and

the warning chime will sound

loudly when driving approxi-

mately more than 13 mph (20

km/h).

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning

system for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

seatbelt warning system monitors whether

or not there is a passenger on the front

passenger’s seat.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

175

Instruments and controls

(178,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

device from functioning correctly or

cause the device to fail.

. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seat-

back.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occu-

pant to place his/her hands or

legs on the front passenger’s

seatback, or allow him/her to pull

the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their

backward-forward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Manual seat” �P33.

If the seatbelt warning system for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system

and its child occupant, although we

strongly recommend that all children sit

in the rear seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passen-

ger’s seat are locked into place se-

curely by moving the seat back and

forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

! Rear passenger’s seats

S03AE0115

1 Second-row left seat

2 Second-row center seat*

3 Second-row right seat

4 Third-row right seat

5 Third-row center seat

6 Third-row left seat

*: Second-row bench seat models

The layout of those warning lights is shown

in the illustration. When the seatbelts are

not fastened, the warning lights for the

seats will illuminate or blink.

WARNING

. The driver must check that all the

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts properly since the seat-

belt warning system may not

Warning and indicator lights

176

(179,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

detect passengers under the fol-

lowing circumstances.

– When cushions or child re-

straint systems, etc., are used

– When a child or small adult is

sitting in the seat

. Observe the following precau-

tions

– Do not apply any strong im-

pact to the rear seat.

– Do not fold the seatback for-

ward when objects are on the

seat.

– Do not spill liquid on the rear

seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately.

– Do not remove or disassemble

the rear seat.

NOTE

. The seatbelt warning system of the

rear seats detects if any of the seats

are occupied by a passenger. Heavy

cargo or large pets on the rear seats

may result in the activation of the

passenger seatbelt warning light

and chime. Fastening the rear seat-

belt prior to loading cargo or large

pets will avoid activating the pas-

senger seatbelt warning light and

chime.

. When folding second- or third-row

seats, ensure that the seats are

empty prior to folding. Items caught

between the seat bottom and seat-

back, when folded, may damage the

seat surface or activate the passen-

ger seatbelt warning light and

chime.

! Operation

S03AE011501

If passengers in the rear seats do not

fasten their seatbelts while the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or

blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not

fastened.

NOTE

. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)

are/is still not fastened while driving,

the seatbelt warning system oper-

ates as follows according to the

vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminate

when driving approximately 4

mph (6 km/h) or less.

– When driving approximately be-

tween 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph

(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not

fastened for 50 seconds, the

seatbelt warning lights will blink

and a warning chime will sound.

The chime will make a peep

sound for 15 seconds, and it then

will become louder and continue

for 35 seconds. The warning light

will blink for 50 seconds, then it

will illuminate steadily and the

chime will stop.

– When driving more than approxi-

mately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seat-

belts are not fastened for 35

seconds, the warning lights of

the unfastening seatbelts will

blink and a chime will sound

loudly. If the rear seatbelts are

not fastened after 35 seconds,

the blinking warning light will

illuminate steadily and the chime

will stop. The warning lights will

continue to illuminate until their

seatbelts are fastened.

. The warning light will turn off and the

warning chime will stop when the

seatbelt is fastened.

& SRS airbag system

warning light

S03AE02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, immedi-

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

177

Instruments and controls

(180,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-

less a technician checks and repairs

the system as needed, the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag

will not operate properly in the event

of a collision, which may result in

injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

airbag system monitors” �P112.

& Front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicator

lights

S03AE03

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-

dicator lights

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator lights

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator lights show you the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag.

The indicators are located as shown in the

illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicator lights illuminate for 6 seconds

during which time the system is checked.

Following the system check, both indica-

tors turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system monitor-

ing.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light will illuminate while the

OFF indicator light will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator light will remain off

while the OFF indicator light will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indicator

lights remain illuminated or off simulta-

neously even after the system check

period, the system is malfunctioning. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer immediately for

an inspection.

& CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Mal-

function indicator

light

S03AE04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light

illuminates while you are driving,

have your vehicle checked/repaired

by your SUBARU dealer as soon as

Warning and indicator lights

178

(181,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is at least one problem or

potential problem somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

! If the light illuminates steadily

S03AE0401

If the light illuminates steadily while driving

or does not turn off after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illuminating

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with

the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap

will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light turn off immediately. It may take

several driving trips. If the light does not

turn off, take your vehicle to your author-

ized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking

S03AE0402

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Charge warning light

S03AE05

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the drive belt. If the belt is loose,

broken or if the belt is in good condition but

the light remains illuminated, contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

S03AE06

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light illumi-

nated. This may cause serious en-

gine damage.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

179

Instruments and controls

(182,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Engine low oil level

warning light

S03AE58

This light illuminates when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the warning light illuminates, check the

engine oil level on a level surface. When

the engine oil level is not within the normal

range, refill with engine oil. Refer to

“Engine oil” �P492. After adding or chan-

ging the engine oil, warm up the engine

and stop it on a level surface, then start the

engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more.

Confirm that the warning light has turned

off after the engine has started. If the

warning light does not turn off after refilling

the engine oil, or the light illuminates even

though the engine oil level is within the

normal range, have the vehicle checked by

a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. The oil level will be detected by the

system just after turning the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. If the

oil level is below the lower limit when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the engine low oil

level warning light will turn on.

. When the vehicle is parked on a

steep slope, the engine low oil level

warning light may not illuminate

even if the oil level is below the

lower limit to avoid erroneous light-

ing.

& Windshield washer

fluid warning light

S03AE42

This light illuminates when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid tank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

0.6 US qt (0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).

& AT OIL TEMP warning

light

S03AE07

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn-

ing

S03AE0701

If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may indicate

that the transmission control system is not

working properly. Contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light (if equipped)

S03AE27

CAUTION

If the R.DIFF TEMP warning light

illuminates, reduce vehicle speed

and stop the vehicle in a safe loca-

tion as soon as possible. Continuing

to drive with this light illuminated

may damage the rear differential and

other parts of the powertrain.

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the rear

differential oil temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, reduce

vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the

nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for

several minutes. After the light turns off,

you can start driving.

If the light does not turn off, contact the

nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE

. If the tire pressures are not correct

and/or the tires are not all the same

size and brand, the rear differential

will be heavily loaded when the

vehicle is driven, resulting in an

abnormally high oil temperature.

Warning and indicator lights

180

(183,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. The rear differential oil will deterio-

rate if its temperature increases

enough for the rear differential oil

temperature warning light to illumi-

nate. It is advisable to have the rear

differential oil replaced as soon as

possible.

& Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.-

spec. models)

S03AE08

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will turn off.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low

tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately one min-

ute, have the system inspected by your

nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned on or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

181

Instruments and controls

(184,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low pres-

sure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should turn off a few

minutes later. Therefore, be sure to

install the specified size for the front

and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

S03AE09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after the vehicle is started.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down. However, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light, and brake system

warning light illuminate simultaneously if

the EBD system malfunctions. For further

details of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) system warning”

�P183.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and turns off approxi-

Warning and indicator lights

182

(185,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

mately 2 seconds after the engine

has started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns

off immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been

started, but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately

and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage, such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction. When

the battery becomes fully charged, the

light will turn off.

& Brake system warn-

ing light

S03AE10

This light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

The brake system warning light has the

following functions.

! Brake fluid level warning

S03AE1002

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of

the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe

location and check the brake fluid level. If

the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in

the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

S03AE1003

If the warning light remains on even though

the parking brake is released, the brake

fluid level may be low or there could be a

problem with the EBD system. Park the

vehicle in a safe place immediately and

contact a SUBARU dealer.

! Electronic brake booster warning

S03AE1009

The brake system warning light illuminates

when the electronic brake booster is

malfunctioning. In addition, the warning

messages “Brake System” and “Check

Owner’s Manual” are displayed alternately

on the combination meter display (color

LCD). If the warning light illuminates,

promptly park in a safe location as soon

as possible and contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Electronic parking

brake indicator light

S03AE85

! Parking brake indicator

S03AE8501

The light illuminates with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position. It turns off when the parking

brake is fully released.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

183

Instruments and controls

(186,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

S03AE8502

WARNING

. When you release the electronic

parking brake while the engine is

running, the electronic parking

brake indicator light will turn off.

However, if the light still illumi-

nates, stop the vehicle in a safe

place immediately and have the

system inspected by a SUBARU

dealer.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

. If the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, the elec-

tronic parking brake system may

be malfunctioning. Immediately

stop your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion, use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing and contact your SUBARU

dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-

tronic parking brake” �P378.

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

electronic parking brake applied, the

electronic parking brake indicator

light remains illuminated for ap-

proximately 30 seconds and then

turns off.

. When the electronic parking brake

switch is pulled to apply the electro-

nic parking brake while the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion, the electronic parking brake

indicator light illuminates, remains

illuminated for approximately 30

seconds and then turns off.

. Even if the electronic parking brake

indicator light flashes, if the warning

light behavior is as described in the

following examples, the electronic

parking brake system is not mal-

functioning.

– The indicator light turns off when

the electronic parking brake is

released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash immediately after

the engine is started. However, it is

not malfunctioning if the indicator

light turns off after the electronic

parking brake is released.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light may flash after the electro-

nic parking brake is frequently ap-

plied and released. However, the

electronic parking brake system is

not malfunctioning if the light turns

off for a short period of time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes when the electronic parking brake

system is malfunctioning. If the indicator

light flashes, promptly park in a safe

location as soon as possible and contact

your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light

remains illuminated when the parking

brake cannot be released even if the

parking brake switch is pushed. For de-

tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake”

�P378.

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-

ing

S03AE850201

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

operated when the parking brake cannot

be applied.

! Frequent operation warning

S03AE850202

The electronic parking brake indicator light

flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound

will be heard if the parking brake switch is

Warning and indicator lights

184

(187,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

operated too frequently. In this case, the

operation of the parking brake switch is

restricted to protect the electronic parking

brake system.

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

& Auto Vehicle Hold indi-

cator light

S03AE94

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light does not illuminate even when

“Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” is

touched to activate the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing.

This indicator light illuminates when the

Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. This in-

dicator blinks while the vehicle is stopped

by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. For

details, refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion” �P380.

& Low fuel warning light

S03AE11

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the tank is nearly empty, at approximately

2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Door open warning light

S03AE12

The warning light illuminates if any door or

the rear gate is not fully closed. This

function is effective even if the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”

position, or the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

For some models, only the open doors are

indicated by the warning lights.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

S03AE13

This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with

tires of differing diameters fitted on the

wheels or with an excessively low air

pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes,

promptly park in a safe location then

check whether all four tires are the

same diameter and whether any of

the tires has a puncture or has lost

air pressure for some other reason.

Continuing to drive with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of the

temporary spare tire should therefore

be restricted to the minimum time

necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as

soon as possible.

& Power steering warning

light

S03AE53

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

185

Instruments and controls

(188,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely

low speeds, such as while frequently

turning the steering wheel during

parallel parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long

period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

that may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehi-

cle Dynamics Control

operation indicator

light

S03AE14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

S03AE1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

also becomes inoperative, causing

the warning light to illuminate.

Although both the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and ABS are inop-

erative in this case, the ordinary

functions of the brake system are

still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but drive

carefully and have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only

illuminates. At this time, the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) remains

fully operational.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem malfunctions.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light, ABS warning light, and

brake system warning light illumi-

nate simultaneously if the EBD sys-

tem malfunctions. For further details

of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Electronic Brake

Force Distribution (EBD) system

warning” �P183.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

Warning and indicator lights

186

(189,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and turns off approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the engine

has started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns

off immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently

being driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately

and remains off.

. The warning light illuminates when

the engine has stalled and continues

to illuminate after the engine has

been restarted. However, it will turn

off once the vehicle starts moving.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

S03AE1402

The indicator light flashes during activation

of the skid suppression function and during

activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the

engine has been started, especially

in cold weather. This does not in-

dicate the existence of a problem.

The light should turn off as soon as

the engine has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light is

on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine

has warmed up) after the engine has

started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

S03AE15

The light illuminates when “Vehicle Dy-

namics Control” is selected to deactivate

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even once

several seconds have elapsed after the

ignition switch has been turned to the

“ON” position.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

187

Instruments and controls

(190,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Warning chimes and

warning indicator of the

keyless access with

push-button start sys-

tem (if equipped)

S03AE55

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning indicator

on the combination meter in order to

minimize improper operations and help

protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator flashes, take the

appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica-

tor on the push-button ignition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside

the vehicle, the access key warning

for engine start may be provided

depending on the status of the

access key fob and the environmen-

tal conditions.

. When the access key fob is taken out

of the vehicle through an open

window, the access key fob takeout

warning or passenger access key

fob takeout warning will not be

provided.

! List of warnings

S03AE5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

Warning and indicator lights

188

(191,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding, ding ...

(intermittent)

— —

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is “ACC”

(when the select lever is in the “P”

position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure to

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch was

switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door

is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

An attempt was made to lock all doors

using the power door locking switch or

access key fob while the access key fob is

left inside the vehicle. For details, refer to

“

Key lock-in prevention function” �P142.

Take out the access key fob from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

The doors cannot be locked while the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors

will be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Access key fob lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

the push-button ignition switch is “OFF”

and the access key fob is inside the

vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,

the doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep

(5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and

one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

If one of the doors including the rear gate

is opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep

(60 seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

carrying the access key fob, the push-

button ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF” (when the select lever is in the

“P” position).

Return the access key fob inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding, ding ...

(7 seconds)

— —

Access key warning:

The vehicle was driven while the access

key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

189

Instruments and controls

(192,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding — —

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch was

pressed while the access key fob is not

inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key fob and closed the driver’s

door while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” (when the

select lever is in the “P” position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Passenger access key takeout warn-

ing:

A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with

the access key fob and closed a door

other than the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

Access key takeout without “P” posi-

tion warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key fob and closed the driver’s

door while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Warning and indicator lights

190

(193,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Long beep

(continuous)

— —

Select lever position warning:

. Case 1: The engine is turned off by

pressing the push-button ignition

switch while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

. Case 2: The driver’s door is opened

while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” and

the select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. Case 1: Start the engine, shift the

select lever to the “P” position, switch

the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the “P”

position, switch the push-button igni-

tion switch to “OFF” and exit the

vehicle.

Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding —

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure was per-

formed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and

left lightly, depress the brake pedal and

press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding —

Flashes in orange

(15 seconds max.)

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction was detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

and have the vehicle inspected.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

191

Instruments and controls

(194,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Security indicator light

S03AE16

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation of

the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

S03AE1601

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm system”

�P144.

! Immobilizer system

S03AE1602

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF”

position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the

following conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is

used (for example, the key is unregistered

or the ID code does not match), the power

is not switched to “ON” and the security

indicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions, it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used to start the engine, the security

indicator light illuminates. For details about

the immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi-

lizer” �P134.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It

means that the matching of the ID

code is completed and the immobi-

lizer system is deactivated, and it

does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running.

– The push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or

closed.

Models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– While the engine is running.

– When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

– For approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position.

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light

flashes irregularly, it will not affect

the functionality of the immobilizer

system.

Warning and indicator lights

192

(195,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Select lever/gear position in-

dicator

S03AE43

1 Upshift indicator

2 Downshift indicator

3 Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the

select lever.

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator (which shows the

current gear selection) and the upshift/

downshift indicator light up. Refer to

“Continuously variable transmission”

�P361.

& Turn signal indicator

lights

S03AE20

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing bulbs” �P517.

& High beam indicator

light

S03AE21

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& High beam assist indi-

cator light

S03AE83

This light illuminates when the high beam

assist function is activated. For details

about the high beam assist function, refer

to “High beam assist function” �P237.

& Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

S03AE33

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates during driving, have

your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU

dealer.

& LED headlight warning

light

S03AE76

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light

S03AE89

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight is turned off. Refer

to “Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)”

�P241.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

193

Instruments and controls

(196,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

S03AEB2

The light illuminates when a malfunction

occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-

light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-

light (SRH)” �P241.

& Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

S03AE25

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicator

light

S03AE24

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. The light switch is turned to the “

” or

“

” position.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the headlights illuminate

automatically.

& X-MODE indicator

S03AE68

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)

1 X-MODE indicator

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)

1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator

2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

This indicator appears while X-MODE is

activated. It will disappear when X-MODE

is deactivated. Refer to “To activate/deac-

tivate X-MODE” �P374.

& Hill descent control in-

dicator

S03AE69

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in standby. It will

flash while the hill descent control function

is operating. It will disappear when the hill

descent control function is not available.

Refer to “Hill descent control function”

�P376.

& BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

S03AE80

This warning indicator appears when the

BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case

the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be

shown on the combination meter display.

When this indicator appears, have your

vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor (if equipped)

S03AE86

This indicator appears on the combination

meter display (color LCD) when “Rear

Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)” is touched

to deactivate the BSD/RCTA or when the

Warning and indicator lights

194

(197,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

BSD/RCTA is suspended temporarily. In

this case the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will

be shown on the combination meter dis-

play. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”

�P386.

& RAB warning indica-

tor (if equipped)

S03AE91

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-

tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB) system” �P395.

& RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

S03AE92

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is

turned off, or when the Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) system is suspended tem-

porarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) system” �P395.

& Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

S03AE82

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning

will illuminate to inform the driver that the

road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be

delayed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. The icy road surface warning screen

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the

road surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

screen appears, it will not disappear

unless the outside temperature has

increased to 418F (58C) or higher.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator

light (green) (if

equipped)

S03AEA4

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is activated. Refer to

“Driver Monitoring System operation in-

dicator light (green)” �P415.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem warning light (yel-

low) (if equipped)

S03AEB6

This warning light illuminates if the Driver

Monitoring System malfunctions. Have

your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible. Refer to

“Driver Monitoring System warning light

(yellow)” �P415.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

S03AEA5

This indicator illuminates when “Driver

Monitoring System” is touched to deacti-

vate Driver Monitoring System. Refer to

“Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator

light” �P415.

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator lights

195

Instruments and controls

(198,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

S03AEA6

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.

Refer to “Driver Monitoring System tem-

porary stop indicator light” �P415.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops

temporarily in the following circum-

stances.

. The temperature of the Driver Mon-

itoring System unit is high.

& One-touch Interior Illu-

mination indicator (if

equipped)

S03AEB5

This indicator light illuminates when the

One-touch Interior Illumination function is

activated. Refer to “One-touch Interior

Illumination function” �P308.

& Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF indicator

S03AE93

This indicator illuminates when the Sonar

Audible Alarm is turned OFF. For the

setting procedure, refer to “Car settings”

�P218.

3-7. Combination meter dis-

play (color LCD)

S03BN

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

combination meter display while

the vehicle is in motion. When

operation of the combination meter

display interferes with your ability to

concentrate on driving, stop the

vehicle before performing opera-

tions on the screen. Also, do not

concentrate on the display while

driving. Doing so may cause you to

look away from the road and could

result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display. Also, a warn-

ing message will appear on the display if a

malfunction is detected. In addition, sev-

eral settings for the displayed content can

be performed.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

196

(199,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Combination meter display

1 Meter information screen (Refer to “Me-

ter information screen” �P198.)

2 Warning screen (Refer to “Warning

screen” �P198.)/Basic screen (Refer to

“Basic screens” �P201.)

3 EyeSight screen

4 Digital speed screen (Refer to “Basic

screens” �P201.)

5 Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale screen”

�P200.)

6 Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-

fer to “Select lever/gear position indica-

tor” �P193.)

7 X-MODE indicator (Refer to “X-MODE

indicator” �P194.)

8 Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”

�P171.)/Double trip meter (Refer to

“Double trip meter” �P171.)

A: Activating the EyeSight system

B: Deactivating the EyeSight system

& Basic operation

S03BN01

Control switches

By operating or of the control

switches, the screens can be changed.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the

information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with

on the display,

press the

switch on the steering wheel.

& Welcome screen (opening

animation) and Good-bye

screen (ending animation)

S03BN08

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the wel-

come screen (opening animation) will

appear on the combination meter display

for approximately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination

meter display gradually turns off by show-

ing good-bye screen (ending animation).

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

197

Instruments and controls

(200,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen may differ in the actual

words and appearance.

. The basic screen will be shown

when the ignition switch is turned

to the “ON” position while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

. Once the welcome screen appears, it

takes a certain period of time to

display it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door,

the welcome screen will not appear

even when the driver’s door is

opened and closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver’s door by

using the remote keyless entry sys-

tem (all models) or the keyless

access function (if equipped) while

the welcome screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen including the

audio/navigation unit can be set to

on or off.

. The welcome screen and the good-

bye screen can be set to on or off.

For details, refer to “General set-

tings” �P213.

& Warning screen

S03BN05

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear on

this screen. Take the appropriate actions

based on the messages indicated.

& Meter information screen

S03BN12

The meter information screen can be

changed. For details, refer to “General

settings” �P213.

! ECO gauge

S03BN1201

The ECO gauge shows the difference

between the average rate of fuel con-

sumption since the trip meter was last

reset and the current rate of fuel consump-

tion.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel

efficiency as shown in the following chart.

Displayed unit

Needle position

“+” side “−” side

MPG Better Poorer

l/100km Poorer

Better

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

Combination meter display (color LCD)

198

(201,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

average rate of fuel consumption is

not shown until driving 0.6 miles (1

km). Until that time, the ECO gauge

does not operate.

! Clock and outside temperature

S03BN1202

This screen displays the clock and outside

temperature.

NOTE

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display.

For details, refer to “Clock” �P231.

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be

delayed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Celsius (8C) or

Fahrenheit (8F). For details, refer to

“Car settings” �P218.

! Compass (if equipped)

S03BN1203

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

! Driving range on remaining fuel

S03BN1204

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

199

Instruments and controls

(202,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Telltale screen

S03BN09

1 Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

NOTE

. When there is warning information

to display, it will be displayed in five

warning indicators, starting on the

left in ascending order of severity.

. If there are 6 or more warning

messages to display, the indicators

will be displayed in sequential order.

Mark Name Page

Door open warning light 185

AT OIL TEMP warning

light

180

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light

185

LED headlight warning

light

193

High beam assist indi-

cator light

193

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light

193

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

194

Rear differential oil

temperature warning

light (if equipped)

180

Engine low oil level

warning light

180

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

195

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

195

Mark Name Page

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

194

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

194

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light

193

Windshield washer fluid

warning light

180

Hill descent control in-

dicator

194

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem operation indicator

light (green) (if

equipped)

195

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem warning light (yel-

low) (if equipped)

195

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

195

Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

196

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

195

Combination meter display (color LCD)

200

(203,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Mark Name Page

One-touch Interior Illu-

mination indicator (if

equipped)

196

Sonar Audible Alarm

OFF indicator

196

& Basic screens

S03BN06

By operating the or switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the screen

that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

: Average fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel

is only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

the remaining fuel, so you must im-

mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Driving information screen:

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition

switch was turned to the “ON” position)

and journey distance (the distance that

has been driven since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

201

Instruments and controls

(204,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Digital speed screen:

1 Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

2 Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

This screen displays each tire pressure.

When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire

and the tire pressure will be displayed on

the screen in yellow.

NOTE

. The tire pressure values are dis-

played several minutes after driving.

. Once the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the low tire pressure,

the tire pressure values will display

in yellow until the system detects the

normal tire pressure.

. Immediately adjust the tire pressure

when the warning light illuminates.

When the tire pressure monitoring

system detects the adjusted tire

pressure, the warning light will turn

off and the tire pressure values will

turn to white.

. You can set the tire pressure units.

For details about setting the units,

refer to “General settings” �P213.

For information about the specified value

of the air pressure, refer to “Tires” �P530.

Compass screen (if equipped):

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

202

(205,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Navigation screen (if equipped):

When the route guidance is set in the

navigation system, this item shows the

navigation route information. For details

about the navigation system, refer to the

separate navigation/audio Owner’s Man-

ual.

Audio screen:

The audio screen shows the status of

audio information. For details about the

audio system, refer to the separate navi-

gation/audio Owner’s Manual.

Clock and outside temperature screen:

This screen displays the clock and outside

temperature.

NOTE

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display.

For details, refer to “Clock” �P231.

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be

delayed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD)

203

Instruments and controls

(206,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Celsius (8C) or

Fahrenheit (8F). For details, refer to

“General settings” �P213.

3-8. Center information dis-

play (CID)

S03BS

WARNING

Always pay attention to safe driving

when operating the center informa-

tion display while the vehicle is in

motion. When operation of the cen-

ter information display is disturbing

your awareness and ability to con-

centrate on driving, stop the vehicle

in a safe place before performing

operations on the display. Also, do

not concentrate on the display while

driving. Doing so could result in an

accident.

& Features

S03BS01

All information is displayed on the center

information display, including vehicle set-

tings, vehicle status, navigation system (if

equipped) operation, audio operation, and

climate control operation.

Interruption screen 205

Vehicle status and

maintenance infor-

mation

207

Vehicle settings 213

Climate control op-

erations

213

Surround View Moni-

tor (if equipped)/Rear

view camera

324/Refer to the navi-

gation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

Navigation system

Refer to the naviga-

tion/audio Owner’s

Manual.

Audio/telephone

Refer to the naviga-

tion/audio Owner’s

Manual.

EyeSight

Refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement

for the EyeSight sys-

tem.

The center information display can also be

used to set and initialize the center

information display itself.

NOTE

. When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections

may not be available.

. The language and units for both the

center information display and the

combination meter display (color

LCD) can be changed. For details

Center information display (CID)

204

(207,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

about language settings, refer to

“General settings” �P213. For de-

tails about unit settings, refer to “Car

settings” �P218.

. The images displayed in this Own-

er’s Manual are sample images. The

actual image may vary depending on

the region and vehicle specifica-

tions.

& Welcome screen

S03BS02

Welcome screen and good-bye screen are

motion graphic displayed on the combina-

tion meter display and center information

display upon entering and exiting the

vehicle.

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the welcome screen will appear for

a short time.

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position while the welcome

screen is shown.

. The welcome screen can be turned

on or off. For details, refer to “Gen-

eral settings” �P213.

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared,

it may not appear again even when

the driver’s door is opened and

closed. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

& Good-bye screen

S03BS08

The good-bye screen will be displayed

under the following conditions.

. The driver’s door is opened after the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position.

. 3 minutes have passed after the ignition

switch is put in the “OFF” position with

the driver’s door closed.

. 10 minutes have passed when the

hands-free phone is used after the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position.

. The battery voltage is low when the

ignition switch is put in the “OFF”

position.

& Interruption screen

S03BS03

Useful messages, such as reminders,

weather information (if equipped) and

traffic information (if equipped) may inter-

rupt the current screen and appear on the

display accompanied by a beep. Take the

proper action according to the message.

& Touch screen operations

S03BS04

The center information display has a touch

screen. Operations are performed by

touching the touch screen directly.

! Touch

S03BS0401

Quickly touch and release once.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

205

Instruments and controls

(208,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Drag

S03BS0402

Touch the screen and move the screen to

the desired position.

! Swipe

S03BS0403

Quickly move the screen by swiping with

your finger.

NOTE

Swipe operations may not be per-

formed smoothly in high altitudes.

& Display

S03BS05

! Touch screen

S03BS0501

1 HOME icon (Refer to “HOME icon”

�P213.)

2 Status bar (Refer to “Status bar” �P207.)

Center information display (CID)

206

(209,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3 Information bar (Refer to “Information

bar” �P207.)

4 Main screen (Refer to “Main screen”

�P213.)

5 Driver profiles icon (Refer to “Driver

profiles icon” �P213.)

6 Manage device icon (Refer to the sepa-

rate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.)

7 Climate control screen (Refer to “Climate

control screen” �P213.)

8 Car settings icon (Refer to “Car settings

icon” �P211.)

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the touch panel will activate.

! Status bar

S03BS050101

The outside temperature and clock are

displayed on the status bar.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. However, the

temperature may not be indicated

correctly or the update may be

delayed in the following conditions.

– While parking or driving at low

speeds

– When the outside temperature

changes suddenly (example:

when going in and out of an

underground parking area or

when passing through a tunnel)

– When starting the engine after

being parked for a certain period

of time

. You can set the temperature units to

be displayed in Celsius (8C) or

Fahrenheit (8F). For details, refer to

“General settings” �P213.

. The clock can be displayed in either

12-hour display or 24-hour display.

For details, refer to “Clock” �P231.

. Touch the clock on the status bar to

display the clock setting screen.

Refer to “Clock” �P231.

. For details about Bluetooth device

information, refer to the navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual.

! Information bar

S03BS050102

Swipe the information bar or touch or

on the information bar to switch the item

displayed.

Audio screen:

The screen of the currently selected audio

source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio set,

refer to the separate navigation/audio

Owner’s Manual.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

207

Instruments and controls

(210,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Navigation screen (models with naviga-

tion system):

The directions to the destination are

displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the

navigation system, the compass orien-

tation, street name and speed limit

remain displayed on the screen.

Favorite screen:

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

Item Details

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil temperature

Average vehicle speed

Accelerator opening ratio

Item Details

Vehicle posture

Direction of the vehicle*

Weather information for the

next three hours*

Weather information for the

next six hours*

Posted speed limit of the

road you are currently driv-

ing on*

Calendar

Driver Monitoring System*

information and the average

fuel consumption of driver

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE

Some items may not be shown depend-

ing on the model and specifications.

The items shown on the favorite screen

can be changed. For details, refer to

“Favorite Widgets” �P224.

Center information display (CID)

208

(211,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Weather information screen (if

equipped):

NOTE

. When all of the following conditions

are satisfied, weather information is

displayed.

– The vehicle is equipped with an

audio and navigation system for

SiriusXM satellite radio.

– The SiriusXM satellite radio sub-

scription is active.

. The weather forecast for the set

destination remains displayed until

a new destination is set or until the

destination is reached.

. Depending on the reception timing

of XM, the weather information may

be delayed.

X-MODE screen:

Models with 1 mode

Models with 2 modes

X-MODE information is displayed on the

screen.

Also, X-MODE can be switched to a

different mode on the screen.

! Main screen

S03BS050103

For details about the following menu, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

. Radio

. Media

. Phone

. Map

. Apps

. My Subaru

. SUBARU STARLINK

. Add Shortcut

! Auto Vehicle Hold icon

S03BS050109

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

209

Instruments and controls

(212,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

and off, touch the “Auto Vehicle Hold” icon.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is off,

the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light on the

combination meter turns off. The “Auto

Vehicle Hold” indicator on center informa-

tion display also turns off at the same time.

Refer to “To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function” �P381.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

S03BS050110

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, touch the “Vehicle Dynamics

Control” icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem is turned off during engine operation,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light on the combination meter illumi-

nates. The “Vehicle Dynamics Control”

icon will then turn off.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will

be deactivated. When you touch the

“Vehicle Dynamics Control” icon again to

reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off. The “Vehicle

Dynamics Control” icon will then turn on.

Refer to “To turn on/off the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system” �P372.

! Cabin Connect

S03BS050114

Touch the “Cabin Connect” icon to turn it

on and off. When the “Cabin Connect”

function is on, the indicator illuminates,

when the “Cabin Connect” function is off,

the indicator does not illuminate. For de-

tails, refer to “Cabin Connect” �P306.

! Display Off

S03BS050112

Activation of the display off mode:

1. Touch “Display Off”.

Deactivation of the display off mode:

1. Touch the display or push the tem-

Center information display (CID)

210

(213,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

perature control button.

2. Press and hold the volume knob to turn

the screen back on.

! Car settings icon

S03BS050104

Touch to display the items that are

changeable while driving.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

211

Instruments and controls

(214,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting procedure

1st menu 2nd menu

Vehicle Control

Vehicle Dynamics

Control

ON/OFF 372 223

X-MODE

Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF

Models with 2 modes: Normal, Deep Snow/Mud, Snow/

Dirt

374 223

Cruise Control Accel-

eration

Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic *

—

Auto Vehicle Hold

(AVH)

ON/OFF 380 223

Steering Responsive

Headlights (SRH)

ON/OFF 241 223

Driving Assistance

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Lane Departure

All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function

Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Rear Vehicle Detec-

tion (BSD/RCTA)*

ON/OFF 392 223

Driver Monitoring

System*

ON/OFF 407 223

More Settings

Warning Volume Min/Mid/Max 391, 405 and *

—

Units

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

170 and 196

223

*1: If equipped

*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Center information display (CID)

212

(215,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Driver profiles icon

S03BS050105

Touch (driver profiles icon) to confirm

the driver’s information. For details, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

! HOME icon

S03BS050106

Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.

! Climate control screen

S03BS050107

The climate control status is shown on the

screen.

1 Driver’s seat heater/ventilation icon (if

equipped)

2 Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)

3 Airflow mode

4 Climate control mode

5 Air inlet selection

6 Air conditioner ON indicator

7 SYNC mode indicator

8 Set temperature indicator (passenger’s

side)

9 REAR SYNC mode indicator

10 REAR set temperature

11 Front passenger’s seat heater/ventilation

icon (if equipped)

12 Customizable icon

13 REAR Climate control ON/OFF icon

14 Fan speed control

15 Climate control ON/OFF icon

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the main screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details, refer

to “Climate control panel” �P283.

! Main screen

S03BS0502

To display the main screen, touch

(HOME).

In this Owner’s Manual, the following

settings will be explained. For details

about other items, refer to the separate

navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.

– “Settings” ? “General”

– “Settings” ? “Car”

– “Car Info”

! General settings

S03BS050201

Set the time and display general items.

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. Select the preferred menu.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

213

Instruments and controls

(216,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Clock

Time Setting*

AUTO/Manual

231

Time Setting*

Sync With Phone/Manual

Time Zone*

AUTO/Hawaii/Alaska/Pacific/

Mountain/Central/Eastern/Atlantic/

Newfoundland/Guam

223

Daylight Saving Time*

AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF 223

Clock Format 12H/24H 223

Display

Display Off Turn the screen off. — 223

Brightness Dial ON/OFF 173 223

Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and

contrast of the display.

223 223

Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi ON/OFF

—

Connected to: Select the registered devise.

Available Wi-Fi Networks Add

Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN Setup/Push Button Setup

Registered Wi-Fi Networks —

Wi-Fi Security Infor-

mation

Wi-Fi Security Information (AP

mode)

—

Center information display (CID)

214

(217,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Wi-Fi Hotspot

Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF

—

Wi-Fi name (SSID): —

Security Type: —

Password: —

Broadcast Frequency: —

SSID Broadcast ON/OFF

Connected Devices: —

Reminder Screen

Maintenance ON/OFF

205

223

Birthday ON/OFF 223

Anniversary ON/OFF 223

Valet Mode

Passcode Setting*

Keyboard: Enter New Passcode

233 223Activate Valet Mode Keyboard: Enter Your Passcode

Change Passcode Keyboard: Change Passcode

Meter Screen

Gauge Initial Movement ON/OFF 170 223

Meter Information Screen

Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/

Compass*

/Gas Range

198 223

Turn by Turn Screen Interrup-

tion*

ON/OFF 201 223

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

215

Instruments and controls

(218,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Camera

Rear Camera Delay Control ON/OFF 324 223

Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF 324 223

Climate Control Customize Climate Button

A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recircula-

tion/SYNC

290 223

Temperature Unit 8F/8C — — 224

Language — English/Français/Español 196 and 204 223

Tire Pressure Units*

— kPa/PSi 201 223

Home Screen Short-

cuts

— ON/OFF *

223

Welcome Screen — ON/OFF 197 223

Goodbye Screen — ON/OFF 197 223

Favorite Widgets — Set a favorite widget from the list. 207 224

Birthday List — Set a birthday. 205 224

Anniversary List — Set an anniversary day. 205 225

Periodic Rest Notifica-

tion*

— ON/OFF *

—

Center information display (CID)

216

(219,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference for

the vehicle system

operation

Page reference for

the setting proce-

dure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

General

Software Update

Update Check if a new software update

—

Automatically Check for Up-

dates

ON/OFF

Automatically Download Up-

dates

ON/OFF

Default —

SUBARU STARLINK

Apps Recovery

— OK/Cancel

SUBARU STARLINK

Auto Connect

— ON/OFF

Factory Data Reset — Reset/Cancel

System Information — —

Free/Open Source

Software Information

—

*1: Models with navigation system

*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK without navigation system

*3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK or navigation system

*4: Models without navigation system

*5: If equipped

*6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

*7: For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.

*8: Displayed until valet mode is set.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

217

Instruments and controls

(220,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Car settings

S03BS050209

Perform the EyeSight system setting and

vehicle setting.

1. Touch (HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. Select the preferred menu.

Center information display (CID)

218

(221,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

EyeSight

Pre-Collision Braking Setting ON/Setting OFF

—

Lane Departure

All Functions/Lane Departure

Prevention Function Only/

Warning Buzzer Only/OFF

Cruise Control Acceleration

Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dy-

namic

Lead Vehicle Acquisition

Sound

ON/OFF

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor ON/OFF

Select Drive on Left/Drive on

Right

Right Lane/Left Lane

EyeSight Assist Monitor

Red Indicator ON/OFF

Yellow Indicator ON/OFF

Green Indicator ON/OFF

Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB)*

Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF 395 223

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

219

Instruments and controls

(222,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Driver Monitoring System*

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF

407

223

Repeat Facial Scan Perform the user recognition. 225

User Recognition ON/OFF 223

Automatically Retract Seat on

Entry

ON/OFF 223

Update Seat and Mirror Posi-

tion

Re-register the driver’s posi-

tion.

225

Delete Driver Position

Delete the registered driver’s

position.

225

Delete User Delete the registered user. 225

Delete All Users Delete all registered users. 225

Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal*

ON/OFF 132 and 137 223

Hazard Warning Flasher ON/OFF 132 and 137 223

Security Relocking*

20 seconds/30 seconds/40

seconds/50 seconds/60 sec-

onds/OFF

139 223

Driver Door Unlock*

Driver Door Only/All 126 223

Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*

Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All 126 223

Center information display (CID)

220

(223,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 276 223

Interior Light —

10 seconds/20 seconds/30

seconds/OFF

308 223

Ambient Lighting*

— ON/OFF 173 223

Auto Light Sensor

Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 234 223

Wiper Link ON/OFF 234 223

Welcome Lighting

Approaching Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

235

223

Leaving Time Set

30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds/OFF

223

One-Touch Lane Changer — ON/OFF 244 223

Auto Door Lock/Unlock

Auto Door Lock

Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out

of PARK*

/OFF

142

223

Auto Door Unlock

Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/

Shift into or out of PARK*

/OFF

223

Rear Seat Reminder — ON/OFF 67 223

Door Mirror Setting*

Auto Electric Folding ON/OFF 275 223

Reverse Tilt ON/OFF 273 223

Power Rear Gate*

Power Rear Gate Memory ON/OFF 156 223

Vehicle Dynamics Control — ON/OFF 372 223

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) — ON/OFF 380 223

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

221

Instruments and controls

(224,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Item

Available settings

Page reference

for the vehicle

system opera-

tion

Page reference

for the setting

procedure

1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu

Car

Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/

RCTA)*

— ON/OFF 392 223

X-MODE —

Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF

Models with 2 modes: Normal,

Snow/Dirt, Deep Snow/Mud

374 223

Steering Responsive Head-

lights (SRH)

— ON/OFF 241 223

Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 391, 405 and *

223

Units —

km, km/h, Liter/

Miles, MPH, Gallon

170 and 196

223

*1: If equipped

*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.

However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.

*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

Center information display (CID)

222

(225,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! How to select items on the screen

S03BS0510

! ON/OFF setting

S03BS051001

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON

or OFF .

! Selecting

S03BS051002

Example

Touch the preferred item.

! How to set items on the screen

S03BS0511

! Brightness/Contrast

S03BS051101

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast

of the center information display.

NOTE

“Brightness” can only be adjusted

when “Brightness Dial” is off. Refer to

“General settings” �P213.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Display”

5. ? “Brightness/Contrast”

6. Drag to adjust the brightness and

contrast.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

223

Instruments and controls

(226,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Touch “Default” to revert to the factory

setting.

! Favorite Widgets

S03BS051102

The menu on the favorite screen can be

customized.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Favorite Widgets”

5. Select the icon of the display position.

6. Select the display item.

! Birthday List

S03BS051103

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be shown when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. This

function can be set to on or off by

“Reminder Screen”. For details, refer to

“General settings” �P213.

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “General”

4. ? “Birthday List”

5. ? “Add”

6. Enter the name.

7. ? “Next”

8. Enter the date.

9. ? “OK”

Center information display (CID)

224

(227,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be

stored.

! Anniversary List

S03BS051104

The procedure for setting an anniversary is

the same as “Birthday List” �P224, except

that in step 4 “Anniversary List” is selected.

! Driver Monitoring System (if

equipped)

S03BS051105

The Driver Monitoring System settings can

be changed.

For setting method for the following menu

on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to

“ON/OFF setting” �P223.

. Driver Monitoring System

. User Recognition

. Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

Repeat Facial Scan:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Repeat Facial Scan”

6. ? “OK”

7. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

forward and wait for a few moments.

When the scan is completed, the

completion screen is displayed on the

center information display.

1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirror

angle, and reverse tilt-down outside

mirror angle so that you are seated in

the correct driving posture.

NOTE

. Start the user registration after ad-

justing the seat position, outside

mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle. If they are

adjusted during user registration, it

may be disrupted.

Refer to “Power seat” �P34 or “Out-

side mirrors” �P273.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position before user registra-

tion is complete, the information of

the adjusted seat position, outside

mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle will not be

saved.

2. Touch

(HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “Car”

5. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

6. ? “Register User”

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

225

Instruments and controls

(228,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7. Select the preferred user from the list.

8. ? “Set”

9. While seated in the driver’s seat, face

forward and wait for a few moments.

When the screen changes, the registration

of the facial scan is completed.

A Forward direction

B Display direction

1 Face forward.

2 Do not lower your chin.

3 Face the display.

*: Display

Center information display (CID)

226

(229,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. If user registration cannot be per-

formed, turn your face forward as

shown in the illustration, then turn to

the display.

. There are some cases where user

registration cannot be registered

properly. In those cases, refer to

“Driver Monitoring System” �P407.

. If “Unable to register. Try again.”

appears, repeat the procedure be-

ginning from step 5.

10. Enter the name.

11. ? “Next”

12. Select the preferred icon.

13. ? “Set”

NOTE

. An existing user can be overwritten

by selecting a registered number.

When a user is registered by over-

writing, the individual fuel economy

data is reset.

. When “User Recognition” is set to

OFF, user registration cannot be

selected.

Update Seat and Mirror Position:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Update Seat and Mirror Position”

6. ? “Set”

NOTE

. Start the user registration after ad-

justing the seat position, outside

mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle. If they are

adjusted during user registration, it

may be disrupted.

Refer to “Power seat” �P34 or “Out-

side mirrors” �P273.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

227

Instruments and controls

(230,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position before user registra-

tion is complete, the information of

the adjusted seat position, outside

mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle will not be

saved.

Delete Driver Position:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete Driver Position”

6. ? “Yes”

Delete User:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete User”

6. Select the preferred user from the list.

7. ? “Yes”

Center information display (CID)

228

(231,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Delete All Users:

1. Touch

(HOME).

2. ?

(Settings)

3. ? “Car”

4. ? “Driver Monitoring System”

5. ? “Delete All Users”

6. ? “Yes”

! Car information screen

S03BS0503

1. Touch (HOME) to display the top

menu.

2. ? (Car Info)

! Driving Statistics screen

S03BS050301

1 Driving Statistics

2 Steering angle

3 Running condition

4 Vehicle posture

5 Telltale screen

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status func-

tions. For functions that are operating, the

indicator will illuminate or flash.

– CONTINUED –

Center information display (CID)

229

Instruments and controls

(232,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle pos-

ture.

. When X-MODE has been turned on,

the screen of the center information

display will be changed to the

X-MODE screen.

. The vehicle posture angle varies not

only due to the angle of the road

surface, but also due to the vehicle

tilt caused by the occupants, cargo,

and acceleration or deceleration.

! Maintenance screen

S03BS050303

Maintenance reminders can be set.

Engine Oil change reminder:

1. Touch “Maintenance” from the 2nd

menu in the car info screen.

2. ?

(Engine Oil)

3. Select “Notification Date” or “Notifica-

tion Distance” of the reminder.

4. ? “Set”

5. ?

Oil Filter change reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Oil

Filter” item in step 2.

Tires rotation reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the “Tires”

item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as the

“Engine Oil” reminder, but touch the

“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.

NOTE

. Touch “Reset” to reset each setting.

. Touch “Update” to revert to the

default value.

Center information display (CID)

230

(233,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-9. Clock

S03AF

For models with a genuine SUBARU

navigation and/or audio system, the clock

can be adjusted using either auto mode or

manual mode.

& Setting the clock manually

S03AF03

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. ? “Manual”

8. ?

9. ? “OK”

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also be

displayed by touching the clock on the

status bar.

& Setting the clock automati-

cally

S03AF02

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Touch (HOME).

3. ?

(Settings)

4. ? “General”

5. ? “Clock”

6. ? “Time Setting”

7. Models with navigation system:

? “AUTO”

Models with SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security without navigation

system:

? “AUTO”

Models without SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security or navigation

system:

– CONTINUED –

Clock

231

Instruments and controls

(234,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

? “Sync With Phone”

! Models with navigation system

S03AF0201

The clock will be set automatically where a

GPS signal is available.

! Models with SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security without naviga-

tion system

S03AF0206

The clock will be set automatically where a

DCM (Data Communication Module in

vehicle cellular connection) signal is avail-

able.

! Models without SUBARU STARLINK

Safety and Security or navigation

system

S03AF0207

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Own-

er’s Manual for the audio/navigation

system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Own-

er’s Manual for the audio/navigation

system. The clock will be adjusted

automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

& Time Zone (models with na-

vigation system)

S03AF06

You can configure the “Time Zone” setting

on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”

is selected, “Time Zone” is set automati-

cally. Refer to “Main screen” �P213 for the

setting.

& Daylight Saving Time (mod-

els with navigation system)

S03AF07

You can configure the “Daylight Saving

Time” setting on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when “AUTO”

is selected, “Daylight Saving Time” is set

automatically. Refer to “Main screen”

�P213 for the setting.

NOTE

. When “Time Setting” is set to

“AUTO”, you can change “Daylight

Saving Time” and “Time Zone” set-

tings.

. When “Daylight Saving Time” is set

to “AUTO”, the “Time Zone” setting

can only be set to “AUTO”.

Clock

232

(235,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-10. Valet Mode

S03BT

When leaving your vehicle with a valet

service, such as at a hotel or restaurant,

you can set the valet mode, which disables

the navigation, audio, and vehicle setting

functions. The display cannot be operated,

preventing the leakage of personal infor-

mation. The valet mode is designed to help

prevent personal information leaks.

& Activation of Valet Mode

S03BT01

1. Touch “Valet Mode”.

2. Enter the passcode.

3. Touch “OK”.

& Deactivation of Valet Mode

S03BT02

1. Touch “Valet Mode” or select OFF .

2. Enter the passcode.

3. Touch “OK”.

NOTE

If you enter the passcode incorrectly

three times in a row when setting or

canceling valet mode, a message

prompting you to contact a SUBARU

dealer will be displayed, but it is still

possible to enter the passcode even

after the fourth attempt.

If you have forgotten your passcode,

consult your SUBARU dealer.

Valet Mode

233

Instruments and controls

(236,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-11. Light control switch

S03AH

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the light control switch

is turned to the off position. If the

vehicle is left unattended for a

long time with the light control

switch set to a position other

than the off position, even though

the lights will turn off after 10

minutes, the battery may be dis-

charged.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the push-button ignition

switch is turned off.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The light control switch operates when the

key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are

turned off when the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be oper-

ated (except auto on/off headlights)

even when under the following condi-

tions.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-

tion (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

. When the key is not inserted into the

ignition switch (models without

“keyless access with push-button

start system”)

If you leave the headlights on for 10

minutes, the headlights will turn off

automatically. Turn the ignition switch

to the “ON” position to illuminate the

exterior lights again.

If the driver’s door is opened while the

headlights are illuminated under such

conditions, a chirp sound will inform

the driver that the lights are illuminated.

& Headlights

S03AH01

For U.S. models

For Canada models

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

Light control switch

234

(237,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

“ ” position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

“

” position:

. Auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

NOTE

The light sensitivity of the auto on/off

headlights can be changed by operat-

ing the center information display. For

details, refer to “Car settings” �P218.

Also, the setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

. If the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights do

not turn on when it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position.

. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights

While the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-

matically turn on when the windshield

wipers operate several times. The head-

lights will automatically turn off when the

wipers stop.

NOTE

The ON/OFF setting of this function can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

“

” position (except for Canada mod-

els):

The headlights are all off.

Only when the following conditions are

fulfilled, instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

“OFF” position (for Canada models):

The headlights are all off.*

*1: When the light switch is switched to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,

the lights turn off. Then the light switch will

automatically return to the “AUTO” position.

*2: The headlights will automatically change to

the AUTO mode when the following condi-

tions are met:

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

! Welcome lighting function

S03AH0103

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlight for smooth approach-

ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or

in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position.

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights.

NOTE

If the engine is turned off after turning

off the light switch, the welcome light-

ing function may not operate (for

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch

235

Instruments and controls

(238,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Canada models).

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking all

doors including the rear gate by using the

remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds

and then turn

off. However, if any of the following

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. The push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” status (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”).

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

The low beam headlights will turn off under

any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by

the welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the door

is opened and closed.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

procedure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking proce-

dure twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the

low beam headlights remain on by the

welcome lighting function can be changed

by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can

change the setting by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P218.

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights

S03AH0101

The sensor is as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

Light control switch

236

(239,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

S03AH02

1 High beam

2 Low beam

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

& Headlight flasher

S03AH03

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

& High beam assist function

S03AH07

NOTE

. The high beam assist function uti-

lizes the stereo camera installed at

the position of the front map lights.

. For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to or

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to low beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch

237

Instruments and controls

(240,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-

tioning or temporarily stopped.

NOTE

. Do not overestimate the capacity of

the high beam assist function. The

driver always has the responsibility

to understand the surrounding si-

tuation, to drive safely, and to

change the headlight mode manu-

ally if necessary.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “opera-

tional”. This setting can be changed

to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU

dealers. For more details, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

! How to use the high beam assist

function

S03AH0701

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights

are on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

High beam assist indicator light

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

light on the combination meter will illumi-

nate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or temporarily stopped,

the headlight will be fixed at low beam.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-

tivity of the high beam assist func-

tion

S03AH0704

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by performing the

following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, set the light control

switch to the “AUTO” position and push

the signal lever forward (high beam

position).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15

seconds, press the “

/ ” (following

distance setting) switch more than 10

times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the high beam

assist indicator light “

” on the combina-

tion meter will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high beam

assist function cannot be lowered

in the following conditions.

– The Cruise Control indicator is

illuminated.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated.

. The sensitivity of the high beam

Light control switch

238

(241,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

assist function returns to normal

level the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and the engine is

restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode

manually

S03AH0702

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to the

center position, the high beam assist

function will turn off and the high beam

assist indicator light will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to

the “

” position, the headlight mode will

be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

light will turn off and the high beam

indicator light will turn on.

NOTE

. After manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you

turn on the high beam assist func-

tion, return the light control switch

to the “AUTO” position.

. When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you

turn the light control switch to the

“

” position, the instrument panel

illumination, parking lights, front

side marker lights, rear side marker

lights, tail lights and license plate

lights will be on.

! Tips for the high beam assist sys-

tem

S03AH0703

. The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the conditions surrounding the

vehicle based on the brightness of

illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc.

Therefore, the headlight mode may

switch in some situations that do not

match to the driver’s sense.

. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

. Under the following situations, the

brightness of ambient illumination may

not be detected correctly and the high

beam assist function may not work

properly. As a result, the glare of the

high beam may disturb the oncoming

vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low

beam mode may continue although

there are no oncoming vehicles and

vehicles ahead. In the such cases,

change the headlight mode manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.).

– When the windshield glass is dirty or

fogged.

– When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

– When the stereo camera is de-

formed or the stereo camera lenses

are dirty.

– If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail lights in the

surrounding area.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead is driven without its

headlights and tail lights on.

– If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if

the light beams are not aimed

correctly.

– When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving.

– When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven surfaces.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

– When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, reflects

light strongly.

– When the headlights of your vehicle

are damaged or dirty.

– When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is

being towed.

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch

239

Instruments and controls

(242,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

– Immediately after the engine has

started.

. In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically

changed from the high beam to the low

beam.

– When your vehicle passes an on-

coming vehicle suddenly in a blind

curve.

– When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead comes in and out of

view because of continuous curves,

median strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light of

the front fog lights of an oncoming

vehicle, the headlight mode may

change from the high beam to the low

beam automatically.

. The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the

low beam mode may continue, when

affected by a street light, traffic signal,

illumination of an advertisement board,

or a reflective object such as a road

sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

– Color or brightness of the headlights

of an oncoming vehicle or the tail

lights of a vehicle ahead.

– The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle

ahead are covered with mud, snow,

etc.

– Movement and direction of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

– When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a

vehicle ahead illuminate on only one

side.

– When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo.

– Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera.

& Daytime running light system

S03AH04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are

illuminated, the tail lights do not

illuminate. When it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position to illuminate the head-

lights and tail lights. This will im-

prove visibility and allow other dri-

vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-

cally illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,

“

” or “OFF” (for Canada models).

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “ ”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

Light control switch

240

(243,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-12. Steering Responsive

Headlight (SRH)

S03BL

1 The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated

2 The target area of illumination when SRH

is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves

the headlight beam to the left or right in

accordance with the steering angle and

vehicle speed. This function helps to

improve the visibility at night by illuminat-

ing the road ahead at corners and inter-

sections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off.

The settings can be changed by using the

center information display. For details,

refer to “Car settings” �P218.

1 Steering Responsive Headlight OFF in-

dicator light

The Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

indicator light on the combination meter

display (color LCD) illuminates when SRH

is turned off.

1 Steering Responsive Headlight warning

light

If SRH is malfunctioning, the Steering

Responsive Headlight warning light on

the combination meter display (color

LCD) illuminates and a message appears

on the warning screen when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position. It indicates

that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

. The SRH function operative/non-op-

erative status is kept when the

engine is turned off, even if the

engine is restarted.

. When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, the Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight OFF indicator

– CONTINUED –

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

241

Instruments and controls

(244,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

light will illuminate and turn off after

several seconds.

. SRH only activates when the vehicle

is traveling forward at the speed of

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or

more.

3-13. Headlight beam leveler

S03AT

The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the head-

lights may become misaligned, and

the headlight beam leveler will not

reset them to the proper angle. This

may occur after transporting your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the

vehicle is parked and restarted on

different angles. In such cases, have

the headlight alignment checked by

a SUBARU dealer.

3-14. Fog light switch (if

equipped)

S03BA

Except for Canada models

1 Headlight switch

2 Fog light switch

Headlight beam leveler

242

(245,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

For Canada models

1 Headlight switch

2 Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the

fog light switch is placed in the “

” position

while the headlights are in the following

condition.

. The headlight switch is in the “

”

position.

. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights

turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights, perform the

following.

. Turn the switch to “

” (except for

Canada models).

. Turn the switch to “OFF” (for Canada

models).

The indicator light on the combination

meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are illuminated.

3-15. Turn signal lever

S03AI

1 Right turn

2 Lane change right signal

3 Lane change left signal

4 Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering,

return the lever to the neutral position by

hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

– CONTINUED –

Turn signal lever

243

Instruments and controls

(246,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& One-touch lane changer

S03AI01

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

NOTE

You can turn the one-touch lane chan-

ger on/off by operating the center

information display. For details, refer

to “Car settings” �P218. Your SUBARU

dealer can also help you change this

setting. Contact the nearest SUBARU

dealer for details.

3-16. Wiper and washer

S03AM

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level fre-

quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the blade rubbers and

might cause the wiper motor to

fail. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear win-

dow, always use the windshield

washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen

to the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

with the blades frozen to the

window glass could cause not

only the blade rubbers to be

damaged but also might cause

the wiper motor to fail. If the blade

rubbers are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster, windshield wiper dei-

cer (if equipped) or rear window

defogger before turning on the

wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-

sition and clean the window glass

to allow proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Wiper and washer

244

(247,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Refer to “Windshield washer

fluid” �P509.

. Do not clean the blade rubbers

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

blade rubbers.

For models with automatic rain sen-

sing windshield wipers:

. When the wiper switch is in the

“AUTO” position, do not touch

the windshield near the rain sen-

sor and do not place a wet cloth

on the windshield near the rain

sensor. Doing so may result in

unexpected wiper operation and

cause injury.

. When washing the vehicle, make

sure that the wiper is turned off.

Otherwise, the wipers may oper-

ate unexpectedly and cause in-

jury.

. When having your vehicle

washed in an automatic car wash,

make sure that the wiper is

turned off. Otherwise, the wipers

may be damaged because they

may operate unexpectedly and

car wash brushes could become

tangled around them.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates con-

tinuously under an unusually heavy

load, the circuit breaker may trip to

stop the motor temporarily. If this

happens, park your vehicle in a safe

place, turn off the wiper switch, and

wait for approximately 10 minutes.

The circuit breaker will reset itself,

and the wipers will again operate

normally.

. Clean your blade rubbers and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt

or road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects, or other mate-

rial on the windshield or the wiper

blade results in jerky wiper opera-

tion and streaking on the glass. If

you cannot remove the streaks after

operating the windshield washer or

if the wiper operation is jerky, clean

the outer surface of the windshield

and rear window using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, how-

ever, use detergent to clean the

blade rubbers. Use only a sponge

or soft cloth (and no neutral deter-

gent or mild abrasive cleaner) when

you clean the blade rubbers. If you

wipe the rubber of the blade

strongly, the black coating compo-

nent will peel off, which will cause

the wiper to judder. Also, after wip-

ing it off, check that the rubber has

not come loose. After cleaning the

window glass and wiper blade rub-

bers, be sure to rinse them with

clean water. Rinse the window until

the water does not form beads on the

glass. This indicates that the glass is

clean.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the blade rubbers with new

ones. For replacement instructions,

refer to “Replacement of wiper

blades” �P510.

NOTE

For models with automatic rain sensing

windshield wipers:

. When the wiper switch is turned to

the “AUTO” position while the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position,

the wipers will operate once. This

indicates that the wiper switch is in

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and washer

245

Instruments and controls

(248,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

the “AUTO” position.

. When the wiper switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the following si-

tuations may occur.

– The wipers may operate if the rain

sensor or the windshield is vi-

brated or objects such as insects,

dirt, mud, etc. are covering them.

Turn off the wiper unless it is

raining or snowing.

– The wipers do not operate if the

rain sensor does not detect rain

or snow. If necessary, push the

wiper control lever down to the

low speed position or high speed

position.

– The wipers may not operate

properly if the rain sensor does

not detect the amount of rain-

drops because a water-repellent

coating, dirt, or ice is on the

upper half of the windshield.

– The rain sensor may be malfunc-

tioning if the wiper intermittent

operation does not vary depend-

ing on the amount of rainfall. If

necessary, turn the wiper switch

to any position except the

“AUTO” position. We recom-

mend that you contact your

SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected as soon as

possible.

– The wipers stop operation if the

ambient temperature decreases

to 58F (−158C) or lower. The

wipers resume operation when

the ambient temperature in-

creases to 148F (−108C) or higher.

If you need to operate the wipers

under 58F (−158C), push the wiper

control lever down to the low

speed position or high speed

position.

– The wipers may not operate if the

temperature around the rain sen-

sor is more than 1768F (808C)

because the system cannot de-

tect the amount of raindrops

under these temperatures.

. This system is also equipped with

the vehicle speed interlocking inter-

mittent wiper function. When the

vehicle stops, the wiper operation

interval will become longer com-

pared with that while driving.

. This system may malfunction in a

location with strong radio waves or

noise.

. If the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the wipers do not

operate when it rains, or the wiper

switch is in the “Low speed” posi-

tion and the wipers do not operate,

turn the wiper switch to the “High

speed” position.

In this case, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

S03AM01

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

! Windshield wipers (models with

automatic rain sensing windshield

wipers)

S03AM0101

/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)

/ OFF: Off

/ AUTO: Automatic operation

/ LO: Low speed

/ HI: High speed

Wiper and washer

246

(249,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down. With the wiper switch in

the “AUTO” position, the wipers operate

automatically when the rain sensor detects

falling rain. The wiper timing is automati-

cally adjusted depending on the amount of

rain.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “

”/“OFF” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

NOTE

The automatic adjusting mode of the

wiper timing can be changed from the

rain-sensing mode to the vehicle speed

interlocking mode. The setting can be

changed by a SUBARU dealer. For more

details, we recommend that you con-

tact a SUBARU dealer.

! Rain sensor

S03AM010101

1 Rain sensor

The rain sensor is on the windshield glass.

! Sensor sensitivity control

S03AM010102

Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of the

rain sensor for wiper control. Turn the dial

downward to increase the sensitivity. Turn

the dial upward to decrease the sensitivity.

! Windshield wipers (models without

automatic rain sensing windshield

wipers)

S03AM0105

/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)

/ OFF: Off

/ INT: Intermittent

/ LO: Low speed

/ HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “

”/“OFF” position.

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and washer

247

Instruments and controls

(250,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control

S03AM010501

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

! Windshield washer

S03AM0104

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning

light illuminates when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light illumi-

nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the

refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-

shield washer fluid” �P509.

Wiper and washer

248

(251,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch

S03AM02

: Washer operation (accompanied by

wiper operation)

: Continuous operation

: Intermittent operation

: Off

: Washer operation (accompanied by

wiper operation)

! Rear wiper

S03AM0201

With the switch turned to the “ ” position,

the rear wiper will operate intermittently at

intervals corresponding to the vehicle

speed. In this position, when you move

the select lever to the “R” position, the rear

wiper will switch to continuous operation.

When you move the select lever from the

“R” (reverse) position to another position,

the rear wiper will return to intermittent

operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off

“

” position, if the front windshield wiper is

operating continuously, the rear wiper will

operate intermittently when you move the

select lever to the “R” (reverse) position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the

reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as

follows.

. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational

. Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs

the rear wiper operation on the rear

gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.

! Washer

S03AM0202

To wash the rear window, turn the knob to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

and the wiper operates until you release

the knob.

The rear view camera washer also oper-

ates while the rear window washer is

operating.

Wiper and washer

249

Instruments and controls

(252,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3-17. Mirrors

S03AP

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror (if equipped)

S03AP01

1 Normal position

2 Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-

glare position.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass with HomeLink

(if

equipped)

S03AP07

1 Compass

2 HomeLink Buttons

3 Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

S03AP0705

Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

S03AP0706

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display

turns on/off. The compass feature will

default to on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is

calibrated.

Compass calibration zones

Mirrors

250

(253,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a

zone number appears in the dis-

play.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location

zone number appears. After you

stop pressing the switch, your new

zone number will be saved. Within

a few seconds, the display will

show a compass direction.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccu-

rate, recalibrate the compass. Press

and hold the “

” switch for more than

9 seconds or until a “C” appears in the

display. Once a “C” appears in the

display, slowly drive the vehicle in

circles until compass is calibrated.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

S03AP0704

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up to

three hand-held radio-frequency remotes

used to activate devices such as gate

operators, garage door openers, entry

door locks, security systems, and even

home lighting. The below steps are gen-

eric programming instructions; for Genie

and Sommer garage door openers, please

go directly to the HomeLink website.

Additional information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features,

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

. It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-

held remote (garage door opener

remote) of the device for quicker

and more accurate training.

. Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be turned to the

“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of

HomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink program-

ming. It is also suggested that

upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink buttons

be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-

tons” �P254.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

251

Instruments and controls

(254,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Programming a New HomeLink

Button

S03AP070409

1 Indicator Light

2 HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink but-

ton that you would like to program. The

HomeLink indicator light will flash

orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing

HomeLink Buttons” �P254).

1 Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 in (2 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink button

that you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 to

30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have

difficulty with the programming pro-

cess.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the

hand-held remote button. Continue

pressing the hand-held remote button

until the HomeLink indicator light

changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to re-

place this “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce-

dures noted in the “Gate Operator /

Canadian Programming” section. Refer

to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-

ming” �P254.

Mirrors

252

(255,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains constant

green, your device should operate

when the HomeLink button is

pressed. At this point, if your device

operates, programming is complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the HomeLink

button up to three times to complete

the programming process. At this

point if your device operates, pro-

gramming is complete. If the device

does not operate, continue with the

next step of the programming in-

structions.

1 “Learn” button

5. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc.) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.

This can usually be found where the

hanging antenna wire is attached to

the motor-head unit (see the device’s

manual to identify this button). The

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the

HomeLink button up to three times. At

this point programming is complete

and your device should operate when

the HomeLink button is pressed and

released.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

253

Instruments and controls

(256,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, please refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communica-

tion” �P255.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-

gramming

S03AP070410

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every

two seconds until the HomeLink indicator

light changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling” process

to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

S03AP070411

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink button. Activation

will now occur for the trained device (i.e.

garage door opener, gate operator, secur-

ity system, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-

held remote of the device may also be

used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink Buttons

S03AP070412

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed

at any time beginning with “Programming a

New HomeLink Button” step 1.

Mirrors

254

(257,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink Button

S03AP070406

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orange after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink button can be released at

this point. Proceed with “Programming

a New HomeLink Button” step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it

will revert to the previously stored

programming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

S03AP070413

HomeLink has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink can receive and display “clos-

ing” or “opening” status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

S03AP070414

1 Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a

new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status in-

dicators flashed, two-way communication

programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication

S03AP070415

1 Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and

2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display

the last recorded status for three seconds.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

255

Instruments and controls

(258,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking

Orange)

2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators.

! Certification

S03AP070416

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

Mirrors

256

(259,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Canada-spec. models

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-

tion.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operating a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the garage door or other device

to prevent potential harm or da-

mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

257

Instruments and controls

(260,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Smart Rearview Mirror/com-

pass with HomeLink

(if

equipped)

S03AP11

! Safety precautions

S03AP1101

WARNING

. Never rely exclusively on the

Smart Rearview Mirror. The

Smart Rearview Mirror has blind

spots that must be checked prior

to operating the vehicle. Please

exercise caution when using this

system.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

main unit, camera or wiring of the

Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is

a strange odor or smoke, stop

using it immediately and we re-

commend that you consult a

SUBARU dealer.

. Never operate the Smart Rear-

view Mirror while driving. Doing

so could result in an accident that

causes serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. Do not put the main unit, camera

or wiring of the Smart Rearview

Mirror close to fire. Doing so

could result in a malfunction

and fire.

. When the Smart Rearview Mirror

malfunctions, change to the mir-

ror mode immediately and we

recommend that you consult a

SUBARU dealer.

. Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror

for extended period of time may

result in car sickness.

. The display could become hard to

see because of lights (e.g. sun-

light or the headlights of ap-

proaching vehicles) from outside

of the vehicle. In this case,

change to the mirror mode if

necessary.

NOTE

When the moonroof is opened (if

equipped):

If the sunlight is too bright to see the

display of the Smart Rearview Mirror,

close the moonroof (sunshade), or

select the mirror mode.

! Smart Rearview Mirror switches

S03AP1102

1 Mode lever

2 Left button

3 Center button

4 Right button

5 HomeLink buttons

Mirrors

258

(261,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! How to use the Smart Rearview

Mirror

S03AP1103

CAUTION

Adjust the rearview mirror before

driving.

1) Change the Smart Rearview Mir-

ror to the mirror mode.

2) Sit with the correct posture in the

driver’s seat and adjust the mir-

ror position to see behind.

3) Change the Smart Rearview Mir-

ror to the display mode.

If you start driving without adjusting

the mirror, light may reflect on the

mirror while selecting the display

mode and it may make it hard to see

the screen.

! To change the mode

S03AP110301

1 To select the display mode, first adjust the

rearview mirror, then pull the mode lever

towards you.

2 To select the mirror mode, push the mode

lever away from you.

Select the display mode to show the image

from the camera that is installed on the

rear gate.

Select the mirror mode to use as a normal

mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the

image from the camera is not shown on the

mirror.

NOTE

. It is not possible to use the Smart

Rearview Mirror in the display mode

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position.

. When using the display mode, parts

of the vehicle interior may reflect

light on the display. Adjust the angle

of the Smart Rearview Mirror to

avoid unwanted reflection.

! Display adjustment

S03AP110307

1 Left button

2 Center button

3 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right buttons

to display the main menu.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on

the display while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

259

Instruments and controls

(262,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Brightness adjustment

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to

set the brightness.

2 Press this button to decrease the bright-

ness.

3 Press this button to increase the bright-

ness.

After pressing the setting button, the mode

will change to the up/down adjustment

mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5

seconds, the brightness adjustment

menu will exit.

Up/down adjustment

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to

set the angle.

2 Press this button to lower the angle.

3 Press this button to raise the angle.

After pressing the setting button, the mode

will change to the left/right adjustment

mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5

seconds, the up/down adjustment

menu will exit.

Left/right adjustment

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to

set the angle.

2 Press this button to turn the angle left.

3 Press this button to turn the angle right.

After pressing the setting button, the mode

will change to the rotation adjustment

mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5

seconds, the left/right adjustment

menu will exit.

Mirrors

260

(263,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Rotation adjustment

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to

set the angle.

2 Press this button to turn the angle

counterclockwise.

3 Press this button to turn the angle clock-

wise.

After pressing the setting button, the mode

will change to the HomeLink menu.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5

seconds, the rotation adjustment menu

will finish.

! Dimming setting

S03AP110306

The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dimming

mirror mode. When the mirror mode is

selected with the ignition switch in the “ON”

position, auto dimming will activate. This

mode decreases glare automatically de-

pending on the brightness level from

behind.

1 Left button

2 Center button

3 Right button

When selecting the mirror mode, press

any of the buttons to display the auto

dimming menu. Press the center or right

buttons to turn the dimming mirror mode

ON/OFF.

Dimming mirror mode ON indicator

Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator

When turning the dimming mirror mode

ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/

OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

261

Instruments and controls

(264,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. When the ignition switch is turned to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, Auto

dimming will not activate.

. When the display mode is selected,

auto dimming will not activate.

! When the display mode malfunc-

tions

S03AP1106

! Vehicle communication error

S03AP110601

When the vehicle communication error,

the warning indicators will appear as

shown in the illustration.

1 Mode lever

2 Left button

3 Center button

4 Right button

When the warning indicators appear,

operate the mode lever to select the mirror

mode. In such a case, we recommend that

you consult your SUBARU dealer for

repair.

If the mode does not change to the mirror

mode even when operating the mode

lever, the mode lever may have malfunc-

tioned. In such a case, press and hold one

of the left, center, or right buttons for 10

seconds. Then the mode will change to the

mirror mode.

! Camera calibration error

S03AP110602

When the camera calibration error, the

warning indicators will appear as shown in

the illustration.

When the warning indicators appear,

operate the mode lever to select the mirror

mode. In such a case, we recommend that

you consult your SUBARU dealer for

repair.

Mirrors

262

(265,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Maintenance

S03AP1104

1 Camera

. Make sure to clean the Smart Rearview

Mirror and the area around the camera

regularly. If these parts are not clean,

the screen cannot be seen clearly.

. Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror and

the area around the camera by using a

dry soft cloth. If the foreign matter

cannot be removed, first wipe the area

off using a wet soft cloth, and then wipe

using a dry cloth.

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

for cleaning. Doing so could result in

discoloration, deterioration, or malfunc-

tion.

. Make sure to clean the rear gate glass

regularly. When you clean the rear gate

glass, first soak a soft cloth with diluted

mild detergent to wipe it off, and wipe

using a dry cloth.

. Do not attach stickers on the rear gate

glass that is in front of the camera.

. When installing a roof box or a similar

accessory, do not block the area in front

of the camera lens to avoid interfering

with the camera image on the mirror.

! Tips

S03AP1105

. Do not use the display mode for a long

time while the engine is not running.

Doing so could result in the battery

discharge.

. Do not install radio antennas around

the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio

waves may disturb the Smart Rearview

Mirror screen.

. Observe the following instructions. Not

doing so could result in malfunction or

the main mirror unit falling off.

– Do not push the button too strongly

or move the lever too forcibly.

– Do not turn the main mirror unit

more than 90 degrees.

– Do not impact the main mirror unit.

– Do not impact the camera or cam-

era cover that are installed on the

upper part of the rear gate.

. If the screen is hard to see because of

light, select the mirror mode.

. If LED lights or scattered reflections are

caught in the camera, the screen may

flicker. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

. If something moves rapidly near the

camera, the display may not be able to

catch the item. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. If the display mode is used, the view of

the rear will be different from the normal

use of the inner mirror or the mirror

mode. Do not rely solely on the Smart

Rearview Mirror; check the rear visually

if necessary. Pay attention to traffic

conditions for safe driving.

. Adjust the brightness of the screen

appropriately. If the screen is too bright,

the driver’s eyes may get tired while

driving.

. When it is raining, use the rear wiper. If

the screen of the Smart Rearview

Mirror is still unclear, even though rear

wiper is being used, check the condition

of the rubber of the rear wiper blade.

. When using the rear wiper, the screen

may flicker when the rear wiper passes

through the front of the camera. How-

ever, this is not a malfunction.

. If the screen of the Smart Rearview

Mirror is not clear, clean the rear gate

glass around the camera. If it is still not

clear, there is a possibility that the

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

263

Instruments and controls

(266,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

surface of the glass is covered with oil.

In this case, remove the oil and clean

the glass.

. If the rear gate glass is fogged, use the

rear window defogger. Use the mirror

mode until the fog is clear completely.

For how to use the rear window

defogger, refer to “Defogger and dei-

cer” �P276.

. The Smart Rearview Mirror sometimes

becomes hot. However, this is not a

malfunction.

. In the following cases, the color may not

be clear. However, this is not a mal-

function.

– The shown items are a very far

distance away.

– The environmental conditions are

very dark.

! To operate the compass feature

S03AP1107

1 Left button

2 Center button

3 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right buttons

to display the main menu. Select compass

mode using the left button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on

the display while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

! To turn the compass feature on/

off

S03AP110701

1 Compass

Select “ON” or “OFF” using the center

button.

Mirrors

264

(267,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Compass calibration

S03AP110703

If the compass appears inaccurate, recali-

brate the compass.

1. Select “CALIBRATE” using the right

button.

2. To start the compass calibration, press

the center button.

3. Select “Continue” using the center

button.

4. Select your current location in the

display using the left button.

5. Select “Continue” using the center

button.

6. Once “C” appears in the display, slowly

drive the vehicle in circles until com-

pass is calibrated.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

S03AP1108

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up to

three hand-held radio-frequency remotes

used to activate devices such as gate

operators, garage door openers, entry

door locks, security systems, and even

home lighting. The below steps are gen-

eric programming instructions; for Genie

and Sommer garage door openers, please

go directly to the HomeLink website.

Additional information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features,

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

. It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-

held remote (garage door opener

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

265

Instruments and controls

(268,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

remote) of the device for quicker

and more accurate training.

. Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be turned to the

“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of

HomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink program-

ming. It is also suggested that

upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink buttons

be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-

tons” �P268.

! HomeLink set up

S03AP110801

1 HomeLink buttons

2 Left button

3 Center button

4 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right buttons

to display the main menu. Select

HomeLink menu using the left button or

press any of the HomeLink buttons.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on

the display while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

1. Select “SET UP” using the right button.

2. Select “Continue” using the HomeLink

left button.

3. Press any of the HomeLink buttons.

4. Be sure to read the displayed instruc-

tions.

Select “Continue” using the HomeLink

left button.

5. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 2 in (5 cm) away

from the mirror.

Mirrors

266

(269,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Garage door opener remote

6. While the HomeLink programming in-

structions are displayed, press and

hold the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 to

30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have

difficulty with the programming pro-

cess.

7. Be sure your garage door is not

moving, then press OK.

8. Firmly press the HomeLink left button 3

times.

At this point, your device should

operate when the HomeLink button is

pressed and released.

9. “Program Success”:

If the programmed HomeLink button

works, select “Yes” and programming

is completed.

If the programmed HomeLink button

does not work, select “No” and pro-

ceed to step 10.

1 “Learn” button

10. At the garage door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc.) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button.

This can usually be found where the

hanging antenna wire is attached to

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

267

Instruments and controls

(270,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

the motor-head unit (see the device’s

manual to identify this button). The

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

11. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete

step 12.

12. Return to the vehicle and press the

HomeLink left button.

13. Firmly press the HomeLink left button 3

times.

At this point, your device should

operate when the HomeLink button is

pressed and released.

14. “Program Success”:

If the programmed HomeLink button

works, select “Yes” and programming

is completed.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers,

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-

gramming

S03AP110803

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every

two seconds until the HomeLink indicator

light changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling” process

to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

S03AP110804

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink button. Activation

will now occur for the trained device (i.e.

garage door opener, gate operator, secur-

ity system, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-

held remote of the device may also be

used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink Buttons

S03AP110805

1. Press any of the left, center or right

buttons to select the main menu.

Select HomeLink menu using the left

switch.

2. Select “SET UP” using the right button.

3. Select “Continue” using the HomeLink

left button.

4. Select the “Trash can icon” using the

HomeLink left button.

Mirrors

268

(271,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

5. To erase the program for the HomeLink

button, select “Clear” using the

HomeLink center button.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed

at any time beginning with “Programming a

new HomeLink button” - step 1.

! Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink Button

S03AP110806

To program a previously programmed

HomeLink button refer to “HomeLink set

up” �P266.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

S03AP110807

HomeLink has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink can receive and display “clos-

ing” or “opening” status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

S03AP110808

1 Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a

new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status in-

dicators flashed, two-way communication

programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

269

Instruments and controls

(272,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Using Two-Way Communication

S03AP110809

Press any of the left, center or right buttons

to display the main menu. Select

HomeLink menu using the left button.

Select “STATUS” using the center button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on

the display while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

1 Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink. HomeLink

will display the last recorded status for 5

seconds.

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking

Orange)

2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators.

Mirrors

270

(273,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Certification

S03AP110810

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com/Subaru,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

. Canada-spec. models

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

271

Instruments and controls

(274,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-

tion.

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operating a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the garage door or other device

to prevent potential harm or da-

mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.HomeLink.com/

Subaru or call 1-800-355-3515.

! Language

S03AP1109

Changes the language displayed in the

Smart Rearview Mirror.

1. Press any of the left, center or right

buttons to display the main menu.

Select “LANGUAGE” using the left

button.

2. Select the language using the right

button and press the center button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on

the display while the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

Mirrors

272

(275,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Outside mirrors

S03AP03

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

S03AP0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the

convex mirror to judge the distance

of vehicles behind you when chan-

ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or

glance backwards) to determine the

actual size and distance of objects

that you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors

before driving.

! Remote control mirror switch

S03AP0302

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left

mirror, “R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional op-

eration.

NOTE

. The mirrors can also be adjusted

manually.

For models with memory function:

. The outside mirror can be adjusted

for approximately 45 seconds after

the following conditions are met.

– The ignition switch is turned to

the “OFF” position.

– The door is unlocked using the

access key fob.

. The outside mirror angle can be

registered with button “1”, “2” or

each of the key fobs. For details,

refer to “Power driver’s seat with

synchronized outside mirrors mem-

ory function” �P35.

. The outside mirror angle can also be

retrieved with the Driver Monitoring

System user information. To do so,

perform user registration in the

Driver Monitoring System settings.

Refer to “Driver Monitoring System”

�P225.

! Reverse tilt-down feature (if

equipped)

S03AP030201

When backing the vehicle up, the right

and/or left outside mirrors will turn down-

ward automatically to provide better rear

visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Move the select lever to the R (Re-

verse) position.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

273

Instruments and controls

(276,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. The outside mirror angle moves down-

ward.

The outside mirror angle will return to its

original position when the following condi-

tion are met.

. Approximately 9 seconds after the

select lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position.

. The vehicle is running.

NOTE

. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle

can be registered with button “1”,

“2” or each of the key fobs. For

details, refer to “Power driver’s seat

with synchronized outside mirrors

memory function” �P35.

. The reverse tilt-down mirror angle

can also be retrieved with the Driver

Monitoring System user informa-

tion. To do so, perform user registra-

tion in the Driver Monitoring System

settings. Refer to “Driver Monitoring

System” �P225.

. The operational/non-operational

setting can be changed by operating

the center information display. For

details, refer to “Car settings”

�P218.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as the front

passenger’s side mirror. The setting

of driver’s side mirror operation can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal during the

reverse tilt-down mirror angle ad-

justment.

To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror

angle, adjust the outside mirror using the

remote control mirror switch while the

reverse tilt-down operates. For details

about how to adjust the outside mirror

angle, refer to “Remote control mirror

switch” �P273.

Memory function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror

can be registered. Register the position

with button “1”, “2” or each of the access

key fobs and retrieve the position.

For details about registration or retrieval of

a position, refer to “Power driver’s seat

with synchronized outside mirrors memory

function” �P35.

NOTE

If the seat is moved forward or back-

ward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the

reverse tilt-down will move to the

factory default position or the last

position hold.

Hold last position function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror

can be set to the latest adjusted angle.

The hold last position function operates

when the following condition are met.

. The memory function is not used.

. The seat is moved forward or backward

1.18 in (30 mm) or more.

NOTE

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “non-

operational”. This setting can be

changed to “operational” at

SUBARU dealers. For more details,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

. If the hold last position function

setting is “non-operation”, the re-

verse tilt-down will move to the

factory default position.

Mirrors

274

(277,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Power folding mirror switch (if

equipped)

S03AP0304

The power folding mirror switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

or “ACC” position.

To fold the outside mirrors, press the

power folding mirror switch. To unfold the

mirrors, press the switch again.

NOTE

. If the outside mirrors have been

operated (folded or unfolded) manu-

ally, when you turn the ignition

switch from the “LOCK/OFF” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “ON” position,

the outside mirrors may be adjusted

automatically depending on the sta-

tus of the power folding mirror

switch.

. If the outside mirrors have been

manually folded slightly forward of

the regularly unfolded position,

when you turn the ignition switch

from the “LOCK/OFF” position to the

“ACC” or “ON” position, the outside

mirrors may automatically fold

further forward depending on the

status of the power folding mirror

switch. When this happens, press

the power folding mirror switch. By

doing so, the outside mirrors which

have been folded to the furthest

forward position will extend to the

regularly unfolded position and then

fold rearward in the usual way. In

order to unfold the outside mirrors,

press the switch again.

. When you unfold the outside mirrors

manually, the mirrors may become

wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mir-

rors by switch operation. If the out-

side mirrors are still wobbly, fold the

mirrors again and then unfold them

by switch operation.

. When the temperature is low, the

outside mirrors may stop during

switch operation. If that occurs,

push the switch again. When the

outside mirrors do not work by

switch operation, move them sev-

eral times manually. This makes it

possible to operate them by switch

operation.

. When you operate the power folding

mirror switch continuously, it may

not work. This is not a malfunction.

Operate the switch again after wait-

ing for a short period of time.

! Power folding door mirror func-

tion (if equipped)

S03AP030401

The mirrors are automatically folded when

the power folding mirror switch is in the

mirror unfolding position, the ignition

switch is turned OFF, and the doors are

locked.

The mirrors are automatically unfolded

when the power folding mirror switch is in

the mirror unfolding position and the doors

are unlocked.

NOTE

. The power folding door mirror func-

tion does not operate when the

power folding mirror switch is in

the mirror unfolding position.

. The setting of the power folding door

mirrors function can be changed by

operating the center information dis-

play. For details, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P218. Also, the setting can

be changed by your SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors

275

Instruments and controls

(278,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

We recommend that you contact your

SUBARU dealer for details.

3-18. Defogger and deicer

S03BI

1 Rear window defogger

2 Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with the defogger

and the deicer (if equipped) system. The

defogger and deicer system is activated

only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

Defogger button

To activate simultaneously the rear win-

dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if

equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped), press the defogger button that

is located on the climate control panel. The

indicator light on the defogger button

illuminates while the defogger and deicer

system is activated.

To turn them off, press the defogger button

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

Defogger and deicer

276

(279,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and the

outside mirrors have been cleared and the

windshield blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, press

the defogger button to turn them off.

It is possible for the defogger and deicer

system to be set to continuous operation

mode by operating the center information

display. For details, refer to “Car settings”

�P218.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may da-

mage the conductors printed on

the window.

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to

the windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper

deicer system automatically

stops operating. However, the

rear window defogger system

and outside mirror defogger sys-

tem maintain continuous opera-

tion in this condition.

– If the vehicle battery voltage

drops below the permissible le-

vel, continuous operation of the

defogger system and deicer sys-

tem is canceled and the system

stops operating.

3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering

wheel

S03BF

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the

fixed position, adjust the steering

wheel again. It is dangerous to

drive without locking the steering

wheel. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

– CONTINUED –

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

277

Instruments and controls

(280,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Tilt adjustment

2 Telescopic adjustment

3 Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to

“Manual seat” �P33 or “Power seat”

�P34.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and

down, and forward and backward.

& Heated Steering Wheel sys-

tem (if equipped)

S03BF01

The Heated Steering Wheel system

warms the steering wheel at a constant

temperature.

1 Heated Steering Wheel switch

2 Indicator light

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel

switch when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering

wheel will be warmed and the indicator

light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off

the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull

the switch again. Then the indicator light

will turn off.

CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheel

system with the engine running.

Otherwise, the battery voltage

may drop below the permissible

level and it may not be possible to

start the engine.

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the Heated

Steering Wheel for a long period

of time. When using the Heated

Steering Wheel, always be sure to

warn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering

Wheel with an object such as a

steering wheel cover. Doing so

may cause the Heated Steering

Wheel to overheat.

. Do not spill liquid on the steering

wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately and dry it before

using the Heated Steering Wheel

system.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

278

(281,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately

above 1048F (408C) when the switch

is turned on, the system will not heat

the steering wheel. Then, the indica-

tor light will continue to illuminate.

. The Heated Steering Wheel system

will automatically turn off approxi-

mately 30 minutes after the system

has been turned on.

. The temperature of the Heated Steer-

ing Wheel system cannot be ad-

justed.

3-20. Horn

S03AR

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Horn

279

Instruments and controls

(282,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(283,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S04

4-1. Ventilator control ............................................ 282

Center ventilators ............................................... 282

Side ventilators .................................................. 282

Rear ventilators .................................................. 282

4-2. Climate control panel ..................................... 283

Front climate control panel ................................. 284

Rear climate control panel (if equipped).............. 287

4-3. Automatic front climate control operation ... 288

4-4. Automatic rear climate control operation..... 289

Rear climate control panel (if equipped).............. 289

Sensors.............................................................. 290

4-5. Manual climate control operation for front

climate control .............................................. 290

Airflow mode selection .......................................290

Temperature control ........................................... 292

SYNC mode ........................................................ 292

Fan speed control............................................... 292

Air conditioner control........................................ 292

Air inlet selection ...............................................293

To turn off the front climate control system......... 293

4-6. Manual climate control operation for rear

climate control .............................................. 294

Locking and unlocking the rear climate control

panel (if equipped)............................................ 294

Airflow mode selection....................................... 294

Temperature control ........................................... 295

Fan speed control .............................................. 295

To turn off the rear climate control system ......... 295

4-7. Front seat heater and ventilation

(if equipped) ..................................................295

Front seat heater................................................ 295

Front seat ventilation ......................................... 296

4-8. Defrosting ........................................................296

4-9. Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner.....................................................297

Cleaning ventilation grille ................................... 297

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ........................................................... 297

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit .............................................................. 297

Checking air conditioning system before

summer season ............................................... 297

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity

and low temperature weather conditions .......... 298

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when

engine is heavily loaded................................... 298

Refrigerant for your climate control system........ 298

4-10. Air filtration system.......................................298

Replacing the cabin air filter............................... 299

Climate control

(284,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4-1. Ventilator control

S04AF

& Center ventilators

S04AF01

Center ventilators

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all

the way down.

& Side ventilators

S04AF02

Side ventilators

1 Close

2 Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

& Rear ventilators

S04AF04

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all

the way rearward.

Ventilator control

282

(285,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4-2. Climate control panel

S04AG

WARNING

. The cooling function operates

only when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center

console lid while operating the rear

climate control panel. There is the

risk of fingers being caught in the

lid.

– CONTINUED –

Climate control panel

283

Climate control

(286,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Front climate control panel

S04AG08

1 Climate control screen

2 Defogger button (Refer to “Defogger and

deicer” �P276.)

3 Passenger’s side temperature control

button (Refer to “Temperature control”

�P292.)

4 Driver’s side temperature control button

(Refer to “Temperature control” �P292.)

5 Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P296.)

Climate control panel

284

(287,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Front climate control screen

S04AG0801

:Touch the climate control mode indicator

1 Climate control mode indicator

2 SYNC mode indicator

3 REAR SYNC mode indicator

4 REAR set temperature

5 Front passenger’s seat heater/ventilation

icon (if equipped)*

6 Customizable icon*

7 REAR climate control ON/OFF icon

8 Fan speed control

9 Climate control ON/OFF icon

10 Driver’s seat heater/ventilation icon (if

equipped)*

11 Climate control mode select icon

12 Temperature control screen (passen-

ger’s side)

13 SYNC icon

14 Temperature control bar

15 Airflow mode selection screen

16 Temperature control screen (driver’s

side)

*1: For details, refer to “Front seat heater and

ventilation” �P295.

*2: The customizable icon can be changed to

the favorite icon. Refer to “General set-

tings” �P213.

– CONTINUED –

Climate control panel

285

Climate control

(288,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Rear climate control screen

S04AG0802

:Touch the rear climate control mode

indicator

1 Rear climate control mode indicator

2 Rear climate control auto mode icon

3 Rear climate control panel lock icon*

4 Fan speed control

5 Airflow mode selection screen

6 Temperature control screen

7 Temperature control bar

*: Touch “LOCK” to deactivate the operation of

the rear climate control panel. “

” will then

be shown on the display of the rear climate

control panel and the rear climate control

mode indicator.

Climate control panel

286

(289,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Rear climate control panel (if equipped)

S04AG09

1 Temperature control button (Refer to

“Temperature control” �P295.)

2 Fan speed control button (Refer to “Fan

speed control” �P295.)

3 Rear climate control ON/OFF button

(Refer to “To turn off the rear climate

control system” �P295.)

4 Airflow mode selection button (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” �P294.)

5 AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic front

climate control operation” �P288.)

NOTE

When the climate control operation is

set to “LOCK” on the center informa-

tion display, “

” appears on the center

information display and the display of

the rear climate control panel. When

“

” is shown on the display, you

cannot use the rear climate control

panel to operate the system. To unlock

the rear climate control panel, refer to

“Locking and unlocking the rear cli-

mate control panel” �P294.

Climate control panel

287

Climate control

(290,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4-3. Automatic front climate

control operation

S04AI

Front climate control screen

1 Air inlet selection

2 Air conditioner

3 Airflow mode

4 Fan speed

When the auto mode is selected, the

following functions are automatically con-

trolled.

. Fan speed

. Airflow mode

. Air inlet selection

. Air conditioner operation

To activate this mode, perform the follow-

ing.

“AUTO” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

1. Touch “AUTO”.

2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature control” �P292.

“AUTO” is not displayed on the custo-

mizable icon:

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch “AUTO”.

3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature control” �P292.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is

running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner will automatically

turn on if the temperature is set

much lower than the current outlet

air temperature. Even in this case,

the “A/C” indicator light on the

climate control screen illuminates.

. The air conditioner may not operate

in the following cases:

– When the cabin temperature is

low

– When the ambient temperature

decreases close to 328F (08C)

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. When “AUTO” is displayed, if you

perform one of followings, “AUTO”

will no longer be displayed.

– Operating the fan speed control

– Operating the airflow mode

– Pressing the defroster button

– Turning on MAX A/C mode

You can then manually control the

system as desired using the climate

control screen. To change the sys-

tem back to auto mode, touch

“AUTO”.

To turn off the front climate control system,

touch “ON/OFF”.

At this time, the air inlet selection mode will

differ depending on the auto mode and

manual mode.

. When the air inlet selection is set to

auto mode: Outside air circulation

. When the air inlet selection is set to

manual mode: No change

When the ignition switch is changed to the

“OFF”/“LOCK” or “ACC” position from

“ON”, the air inlet mode will automatically

change to the outside air circulation

regardless of whether it is the auto mode

or manual mode.

Automatic front climate control operation

288

(291,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4-4. Automatic rear climate

control operation

S04AC

Rear climate control screen

1 Rear climate control auto mode icon

2 Rear climate control panel lock icon (if

equipped)

3 Fan speed

4 Airflow mode

You can operate the rear climate control

using the rear climate control screen on

the center information display.

To activate the automatic rear climate

control, perform the following.

1. Touch the rear climate control mode

indicator.

2. Touch “AUTO”.

3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature control” �P292.

NOTE

When “ ” is shown on the rear climate

control mode indicator, you cannot use

the rear climate control panel to oper-

ate the system.

& Rear climate control panel (if

equipped)

S04AC14

For vehicles equipped with a rear climate

control panel, you can operate the rear

climate control using the rear climate

control panel.

Display of the rear climate control panel

1 Set temperature indicator

2 Airflow mode indicator

3 Fan speed indicator

4 AUTO indicator

5 Rear climate control lock indicator

6 SYNC indicator

To activate AUTO mode, perform the

following.

1. Press the “AUTO” button.

2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to

“Temperature control” �P292.

NOTE

When the climate control operation is

set to “LOCK” on the center informa-

tion display, “

” appears on the center

information display and the display of

the rear climate control panel. When

“

” is shown on the display, you

cannot use the rear climate control

panel to operate the system. To unlock

the rear climate control panel, refer to

“Locking and unlocking the rear cli-

mate control panel” �P294.

– CONTINUED –

Automatic rear climate control operation

289

Climate control

(292,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Sensors

S04AI03

1 Solar sensor

2 Interior air temperature sensor

1 Rear interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are not treated properly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not subject the sensors to impact.

. Keep water away from the sensors.

. Do not cover the sensors.

. Do not touch the rear interior air

temperature sensor.

4-5. Manual climate control

operation for front climate

control

S04AJ

& Airflow mode selection

S04AJ01

Select the preferred airflow mode by the

following operation.

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Manual climate control operation for front climate control

290

(293,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets

and foot outlets

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the

instrument panel and some through wind-

shield defroster outlets (A small amount of

air flows to the windshield and both side

windows to prevent fogging.)

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”

�P296.)

– CONTINUED –

Manual climate control operation for front climate control

291

Climate control

(294,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Temperature control

S04AJ02

Perform the following operation to regulate

the temperature of airflow from the air

outlets.

Temperature control buttons:

Press the temperature control button to the

blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).

Temperature control screen:

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

2. Select the preferred temperature by

the following operation.

. Touch and move the temperature

control bar.

. Touch “

”/“ ”.

. Touch the preferred temperature in

the temperature control screen.

! Max A/C mode

S04AJ0208

For quicker cooling, touch “MAX A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon or

customizable icon.

When the Max A/C mode is on, the

following settings will be changed auto-

matically.

. The air conditioner will turn on.

. The temperature will be set on the

lowest.

. The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

. The air inlet will be set to the recircula-

tion mode.

. The airflow mode setting will be set to

the ventilation mode.

To turn off the Max A/C mode and return to

the previous setting, touch “MAX A/C”

again.

& SYNC mode

S04AJ10

. When the “SYNC” mode is turned on,

the front passenger’s and rear passen-

ger’s side (when rear climate control is

on) settings are synchronized with the

driver’s side settings. The following

settings will be in synch:

– Temperature control (front passen-

ger’s and rear passenger’s side)

– Airflow mode (rear passenger’s

side)

– Fan speed control (rear passen-

ger’s side)

. If “SYNC” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon, touch “SYNC” to turn the

SYNC mode on or off.

. If a customizable icon other than

“SYNC” is displayed, touch the climate

control mode indicator. Then touch

“SYNC” to turn the SYNC mode on or

off.

When the SYNC mode is turned on, the

SYNC mode indicator and rear SYNC

mode indicator (when rear climate control

is on) will turn white.

Touch “SYNC” again or adjust the front

passenger’s side temperature to cancel

the “SYNC” mode. Operating the rear

climate control panel cancels “SYNC”

mode only for the rear climate control

system.

& Fan speed control

S04AJ03

Select the preferred fan speed by touching

or on the climate control screen.

& Air conditioner control

S04AJ04

The air conditioner operates only when the

engine is running.

Perform the following operation while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air

conditioner.

. If “A/C” is displayed on the customiz-

able icon, touch “A/C”. When the air

conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator

illuminates. And an A/C icon will be

displayed on the climate control mode

indicator.

. If a customizable icon other than “A/C”

is displayed, touch the climate control

mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on

the climate control mode select icon.

When the air conditioner is on, the “A/C”

indicator illuminates. And an A/C icon

Manual climate control operation for front climate control

292

(295,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

To turn off the air conditioner, touch “A/C”

again. The indicator light will turn off.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. However, if the ambient

temperature decreases to approxi-

mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner

and dehumidification system may not

work properly.

& Air inlet selection

S04AJ05

Select the air inlet by touching the air inlet

selection icon.

Recirculation mode: Interior air is recir-

culated inside the vehicle. This mode is

used for the following cases.

. When driving on a dusty road

. When you want cooling performance to

increase (for example, in particularly

hot weather)

Perform the following operation to select

this mode.

is displayed on the customizable

icon:

(1) Touch

is not displayed on the customiz-

able icon:

(1) Touch the climate control mode

indicator.

(2) Touch

on the climate control

mode select icon.

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

Outside air circulation mode: Outside

air is drawn into the passenger compart-

ment. This mode is used for the following

cases.

. When the road is no longer dusty

. When the interior has cooled to a

comfortable temperature

Perform the same operation as the recir-

culation mode to change the mode.

will be displayed on the climate control

mode indicator.

WARNING

Continued operation in the recircu-

lation mode may fog up the win-

dows. Switch to the outside air

circulation mode as soon as the

outside dusty condition clears.

NOTE

When outside air circulation is se-

lected, the system may automatically

adjust the air inlet setting depending on

such factors as the temperature

setting, the temperature inside the

vehicle, or conditions outside the ve-

hicle.

& To turn off the front climate

control system

S04AJ07

To turn off the front climate control system:

touch “ON/OFF”.

Manual climate control operation for front climate control

293

Climate control

(296,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4-6. Manual climate control

operation for rear climate

control

S04AK

You can adjust the settings of the rear

climate control using the rear climate

control screen on the center information

display or the rear climate control panel.

To control the rear climate control on the

center information display, touch the rear

climate control mode indicator on center

information display.

& Locking and unlocking the

rear climate control panel (if

equipped)

S04AK08

To lock the rear climate control panel,

touch “LOCK” of the rear climate control

screen on the center information display.

The rear climate control panel lock indi-

cator “

” is shown on the rear climate

control mode indicator on the center

information display and display of the rear

climate control panel.

To unlock the rear climate control panel,

touch “LOCK” again.

& Airflow mode selection

S04AK01

Select the airflow mode using the airflow

mode selection button on the rear climate

control panel or the rear climate control

screen on the center information display.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation: Rear ventilator outlets

Heat: Foot outlets under the rear left side

trim

Bi-level: Rear ventilator outlets and Foot

outlets under the rear left side trim

Manual climate control operation for rear climate control

294

(297,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Temperature control

S04AK02

Adjust the temperature setting using the

rear climate control screen on the center

information display or the buttons on the

rear climate control panel.

NOTE

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. If the air conditioner icon on the front

climate control screen on the center

information display is turned off, the

rear interior temperature may not

become the setting temperature.

& Fan speed control

S04AK03

Select the preferred fan speed using the

rear climate control screen on the center

information display or the fan speed

control button on the rear climate control

panel.

& To turn off the rear climate

control system

S04AK07

To turn off the rear climate control system,

touch the rear climate control ON/OFF

icon on the center information display or

press the ON/OFF button on the rear

climate control panel.

4-7. Front seat heater and

ventilation (if equipped)

S04AL

& Front seat heater

S04AL01

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

1 Seat heater indicator

2 Front passenger’s seat heater icon

3 Driver’s seat heater icon

Touch the driver’s/passenger’s seat hea-

ter icon on the climate control screen.

Each time you touch the icon, the mode

will change as follows.

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat

to heat up quicker.

Holding and releasing the seat heater icon

turns the seat heater off in any mode.

NOTE

The front seat heater function cannot

be used simultaneously with the seat

ventilation (if equipped).

– CONTINUED –

Front seat heater and ventilation

295

Climate control

(298,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Front seat ventilation

S04AL02

The front seat ventilation operates when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

1 Seat ventilation indicator

2 Front passenger’s seat ventilation icon

3 Driver’s seat ventilation icon

Touch the driver’s/passenger’s seat venti-

lation icon on the climate control screen.

Each time you touch the icon, the mode

will change as follows.

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Holding and releasing the seat ventilation

icon turns the seat ventilation off in any

mode.

4-8. Defrosting

S04AH

Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or

dehumidify the windshield and front door

windows.

NOTE

. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner oper-

ates automatically regardless of the

position of the air conditioner icon to

defrost the windshield more quickly.

However the indicator on the air

conditioner icon may not illuminate.

At the same time, the air inlet selec-

tion is automatically set to the out-

side air mode.

. After defrosting the windshield by

pressing the defroster button “

”,

Defrosting

296

(299,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

pressing the button again returns

the system to the setting that had

been selected before the defroster

was activated.

4-9. Operating tips for heater

and air conditioner

S04AD

& Cleaning ventilation grille

S04AD01

1 Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

S04AD02

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

allow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of the

air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-

ciency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

S04AD03

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

S04AD04

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

297

Climate control

(300,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

S04AD05

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning

system.

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

S04AD06

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

S04AD07

1 Air conditioner label

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).

Before adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant, check the air conditioner label

in the location shown in the illustration to

confirm which type of refrigerant is used in

your vehicle.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.

Repairs needed as a result of using the

wrong refrigerant are not covered under

warranty.

4-10. Air filtration system

S04AE

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the cabin air filter according to

the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty conditions, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. Have

your filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use

only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

Air filtration system

298

(301,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Replacing the cabin air filter

S04AE01

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take measures

to protect the center console with

masking tape first, so that you avoid

scratching the center console with the

glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and

then pull down the glove box as far

as it will go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion.

When doing this, be careful not to

damage the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to

the following procedure in order to

prevent dust on the air cleaner from

falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the

filter cover.

(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter

and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).

(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

– CONTINUED –

Air filtration system

299

Climate control

(302,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new

one and then reinstall the cover.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

Air filtration system

300

(303,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S05

5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 302

Printed antenna .................................................. 302

Roof antenna ..................................................... 302

5-2. Audio set..........................................................302

Audio

(304,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

5-1. Antenna

S05AA

& Printed antenna

S05AA01

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

The antenna is printed on the inner surface

of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate

significantly if you apply tinting film or

any other material over the antenna

portion of the rear window glass.

& Roof antenna

S05AA04

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

5-2. Audio set

S05AC

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

Antenna

302

(305,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(306,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(307,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S06

6-1. Cabin Connect (if equipped).......................... 306

6-2. Interior lights................................................... 306

Map lights .......................................................... 306

Reading light ...................................................... 307

Cargo area light..................................................307

OFF delay timer .................................................. 308

One-touch Interior Illumination function

(if equipped) ..................................................... 308

6-3. Sun visors ....................................................... 309

Vanity mirror with light .......................................310

6-4. Overhead console........................................... 310

Cabin view mirror ............................................... 310

6-5. Storage compartment..................................... 311

Glove box........................................................... 311

Center console ................................................... 312

Cup holders........................................................312

Bottle holders.....................................................313

6-6. Power outlets .................................................. 314

12 V power outlet ............................................... 314

Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option) ....... 315

120 V power outlet (if equipped).......................... 315

6-7. USB power supply.......................................... 316

How to use the USB power supply ...................... 317

6-8. Ashtray (dealer option) ...................................318

6-9. Floor mat..........................................................319

6-10. Assist grip......................................................319

6-11. Coat hook.......................................................320

6-12. Shopping bag hook.......................................321

6-13. Cargo area cover (if equipped) ....................321

Using the cover.................................................. 321

To remove the cover housing ............................. 322

Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 322

To install the cover housing ............................... 323

6-14. Cargo tie-down hooks...................................323

6-15. Under-floor storage compartment................324

6-16. Surround View Monitor (if equipped)...........324

How to change the display of Surround View

Monitor ............................................................ 325

How to cancel Surround View Monitor ................ 327

How to view the camera images ......................... 328

Range of Surround View Monitor........................ 331

Using the camera ............................................... 331

6-17. Rear view camera..........................................332

How to use the rear view camera........................ 333

Viewing range on the screen .............................. 334

Help lines........................................................... 335

Interior equipment

(308,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

6-1. Cabin Connect (if

equipped)

S06BI

You can use “Cabin Connect” to speak to

the 3rd-row seat passenger.

Touch the “Cabin Connect” icon to toggle

this function “ON” and “OFF”. For details,

refer to “Cabin Connect” �P210.

You can change the volume settings. For a

detailed explanation of the settings, refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

NOTE

The audio system’s volume adjusts

automatically when this function is on.

6-2. Interior lights

S06AA

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are turned off to

avoid battery discharge.

& Map lights

S06AA06

1 Door interlock switch

To turn on the map light, push the lens.

To turn it off, push the lens again.

Cabin Connect

306

(309,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Automatic illumination

S06AA0603

When the door interlock switch is in the

“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate

automatically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors other than the rear

gate is opened.

. The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function (if equipped).

Refer to “Locking and unlocking by

holding the access key fob” �P122.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system”

�P135.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” or “ACC” position to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

& Reading light

S06AA08

To turn on the reading light, push the lens.

To turn it off, push the lens again.

! Automatic illumination

S06AA0801

The reading lights illuminate automatically

in the following cases, even if the door

interlock switch on the map light is in any

position.

. Any of the doors other than the rear

gate is opened.

. The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function (if equipped).

Refer to “Locking and unlocking by

holding the access key fob” �P122.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system”

�P135.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” or “ACC” position to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

& Cargo area light

S06AA02

1 DOOR

2 OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear

gate is opened. The light remains illumi-

nated for several seconds and gradually

turns off after the rear gate is closed.

OFF: The light remains off.

– CONTINUED –

Interior lights

307

Interior equipment

(310,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& OFF delay timer

S06AA07

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. Reading light

. Map light

. Cargo area light

When the interior light switch is set to the

“DOOR” position (except the reading

light), the light will automatically turn on

and turn off depending on the locking and

unlocking of the doors, the opening and

closing of the doors including the rear gate,

as well as the position of the ignition

switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in

which the lights remain on (OFF delay

timer) can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details. Also, the setting can be

changed by operating the center infor-

mation display. For details, refer to “Car

settings” �P218.

& One-touch Interior Illumina-

tion function (if equipped)

S06AA09

Push the One-touch Interior Illumination

switch once to illuminate the map light (if

the map light switch is in the “DOOR”

position) and reading light.

When the map light and reading light are

illuminated by the One-touch Interior Illu-

mination function, the lights will be turned

off by one of the following operation.

. Push the One-touch Interior Illumina-

tion switch once.

. Push the lock button on the access key

fob or transmitter.

. Hold the front door handle and lock it

while holding the access key fob (if

equipped).

. Push the power rear gate lock switch/

rear lock button while holding the

access key fob to lock the rear gate.

NOTE

. When the lights are illuminated

using function other than this, the

lights will not be turned off even

though the One-touch Interior Illu-

mination switch is pushed.

. If the battery drainage prevention

function is activated, the map light

and reading light will be turned off.

Interior lights

308

(311,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

6-3. Sun visors

S06AC

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can slide the sun visor toward

the rear to prevent glare through the gap

between the sun visor and center pillar. To

slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear of

the vehicle. When you have finished

sliding it, push it toward the front of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not slide the sun visor over the

windshield. The slid sun visor would

obstruct your view of the rearview

mirror.

– CONTINUED –

Sun visors

309

Interior equipment

(312,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Vanity mirror with light

S06AC02

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being blinded by glare.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

6-4. Overhead console

S06BC

To open the console, push up the lid lightly

that is located on the “PUSH” mark and it

will automatically open.

WARNING

Do not use the overhead console

while driving. Doing so may distract

you from the road conditions ahead

and cause an accident that may

result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

. When your vehicle is parked in

the sun or on a warm day, the

inside of the overhead console

heats up. Avoid storing plastic or

other heat vulnerable or flam-

mable articles such as a lighter

in the overhead console.

. Do not pull the lid when opening

the overhead console.

There is the risk that the over-

head console may be damaged.

& Cabin view mirror

S06BC01

1 Cabin view mirror

To use the cabin view mirror, push up the

“PUSH” mark located on the lid lightly and

it will automatically open.

Overhead console

310

(313,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Push the lid back up half way.

NOTE

When opening the overhead console

while the cabin view mirror is in use,

first close the lid and then push up the

“PUSH” mark to open the console.

6-5. Storage compartment

S06AD

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

& Glove box

S06AD01

1 Rotate the key clockwise to lock.

2 Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-

lock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

. The emergency key is directional. If

the key cannot be inserted, change

the direction that the grooved side is

facing and insert it again.

. For models with the “keyless access

with push-button start system”, use

the emergency key to lock or unlock

the glove box.

– CONTINUED –

Storage compartment

311

Interior equipment

(314,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Center console

S06AD02

The center console box provides a storage

space.

1 Coin tray

2 Accessory tray

The top of the console can be used as an

armrest.

& Cup holders

S06AD16

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might scald you

and/or your passengers. Spilled

beverages may also damage up-

holstery or carpets.

. When a cup in the rear passen-

ger’s cup holder contains a bev-

erage, do not fold down the rear

seatback. Otherwise, the bever-

age could spill and, if the bev-

erage is hot, it could scald you

and/or your passengers.

Front passenger’s cup holder

The cup holder is built into the center

console.

2nd-row seat’s cup holder (2nd-row cap-

tain seat models)

The cup holder is built into the center

console. To use the cup holder, pull the cup

holder lid.

2nd-row seat’s cup holder (2nd-row bench

seat models)

Storage compartment

312

(315,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The cup holder is built into the armrest.

3rd-row seat’s cup holder (left side)

3rd-row seat’s cup holder (right side)

The cup holder is built into the rear side

trim.

& Bottle holders

S06AD17

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could scald

you and/or your passengers.

Front door bottle holder

Rear door bottle holder

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

Storage compartment

313

Interior equipment

(316,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

6-6. Power outlets

S06AF

CAUTION

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones, such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not in

use.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with shifting gears and

operating the accelerator and

brake pedals. If they do, do not

use the electrical appliance while

driving.

& 12 V power outlet

S06AF02

Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at

any of the accessory power outlets when

the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or

“ON” position. Accessory power outlets

are located in the following places.

Power outlet

Power outlet in the cargo area

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-

ance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120 W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlets.

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12 V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120 W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

Power outlets

314

(317,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. When using appliances con-

nected to two outlets simulta-

neously, the total power con-

sumed by them must not exceed

120 W. Overloading the acces-

sory power outlet can cause a

short circuit. Do not use double

adapters or more than one elec-

trical appliance.

& Use with the cigarette lighter

(dealer option)

S06AF01

To use the accessory power outlet as a

cigarette lighter socket, purchase the

cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional

accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is

available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will

automatically spring up when ready for

use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the

heating element. Doing so could

result in injury and could also da-

mage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket is

originally designed to use a gen-

uine SUBARU cigarette lighter

plug. Do not use a non-genuine

cigarette lighter plug in the sock-

et. Doing so may cause a short-

circuit and overheating, resulting

in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the

portion of the socket’s internal

mechanism that causes a cigar-

ette lighter plug to “pop out” after

its lighter element is heated.

Therefore, do not place a cigar-

ette lighter plug in a socket that

has been used, even once, to

power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick

and overheat, creating a potential

fire hazard.

& 120 V power outlet (if

equipped)

S06AF03

Electrical power (120 V AC) is available at

any of the power outlets when the ignition

switch is in either the “ACC” or “ON”

position. Power outlets are located in the

following places.

Power outlet behind the center console

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 100 W.

– CONTINUED –

Power outlets

315

Interior equipment

(318,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 120 V

AC. The maximum power rating

of an appliance that can be con-

nected is 100 W. Do not use an

appliance which exceeds the in-

dicated wattage for each outlet.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 100 W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

. When using appliances con-

nected to two outlets simulta-

neously, the total power con-

sumed by them must not exceed

100 W. Overloading the acces-

sory power outlet can cause a

short circuit. Do not use double

adapters or more than one elec-

trical appliance.

. Remove the plug from the power

outlet before operating the sec-

ond-row seat slide. There is a risk

that the 120 V power outlet or

plug may be damaged.

6-7. USB power supply

S06AY

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB term-

inal that can be used is the Type-

A and Type-C. If a different spe-

cification of terminal is con-

nected, power supply or charging

may not be possible, or the

device may malfunction.

. There is a risk that a connected

device may malfunction or data

may be damaged. The connec-

tion of a device shall be per-

formed at your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or a

malfunction, observe the follow-

ing precautions.

– Do not connect a USB hub.

– Do not insert any metal or

other foreign objects into the

USB terminal.

– Do not spill water or other

liquid on the USB terminal.

. Be careful not to pull the con-

nected cable. Doing so could

break the USB terminal and the

connected device.

. If a device is connected for a long

time when the engine is not

running, the battery may be dis-

charged. Even when the engine is

running, we recommend that you

do not connect a device for an

unnecessarily long time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioning

device. Doing so may cause

smoke and fire.

. Remove the USB electronic de-

vice from the console USB power

supply before operating the sec-

ond-row seat slide. There is a risk

that the USB power supply or

USB electronic device may be

damaged.

. Put the cap on the 3rd-row seat

USB terminal when it is not in

use. If any foreign objects get

into the USB terminal, that could

cause a short circuit.

NOTE

. The rated voltage of each USB

terminal is DC 5 V. For details about

the maximum rated power, refer to

“How to use the USB power supply”

�P317. Before connecting a device,

be sure to read the instruction

manual of the device and check

USB power supply

316

(319,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

whether or not this specification of

the output is supported by the

device. If a device that requires

power exceeding the maximum rat-

ing is connected, power supply or

charging may not be possible. Even

if charging could be completed, the

time required for charging may be

longer than when the genuine char-

ger for that device is used.

. Depending on the device, charging

may be possible only when a special

cable is used. In this case, be sure to

connect the device using the special

cable.

. When a device that communicates

with a PC is connected, power

supply or charging may not be

possible.

. When connect a device for charging,

disconnect the device promptly after

charging is completed.

& How to use the USB power

supply

S06AY01

Front seat USB power supply (an audio

device can be connected and used)

2-terminal type USB power supply

– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*

– USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB

terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

1-terminal type USB power supply

– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A

Console USB power supply (power supply

function only)

– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*

– USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB

terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

– CONTINUED –

USB power supply

317

Interior equipment

(320,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3rd-row seat USB power supply (power

supply function only) (if equipped)

– USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.1 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB

terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A.

Use the USB terminal to use or charge an

electronic device.

When using the terminal, open the USB

power supply cover. After use, close the

USB power supply cover.

When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the power can be supplied

to the electronic device.

6-8. Ashtray (dealer option)

S06AG

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This could

cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

holders” �P312. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders”

�P313.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Ashtray (dealer option)

318

(321,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

6-9. Floor mat

S06AJ

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-

lent designed with grommets in

the correct locations.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed in its proper loca-

tion and is correctly secured on

its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

6-10. Assist grip

S06BD

1 Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the

body of the passengers when they are in

the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when

getting up from the seat. Holding

and pulling the assist grip in the

wrong way could break the grip and

possibly cause injury.

– CONTINUED –

Floor mat

319

Interior equipment

(322,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the

assist grip. Doing so could break it

and damage the object.

6-11. Coat hook

S06AH

A coat hook is attached to the rear

passenger’s assist grip.

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

. Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on

the coat hooks. Hang clothing

directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

. Before hanging clothing on the

coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pock-

ets.

If these instructions are ignored, the

following may occur in sudden

stops or in a collision.

. Serious injuries by the items

thrown through the cabin

. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-

ployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Coat hook

320

(323,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

6-12. Shopping bag hook

S06AI

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

6-13. Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

S06AK

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

S06AK01

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear

gate stays while extending and re-

winding the cover.

Scratches on the stays could cause

leakage of gas from the stays, which

may result in their inability to hold

the rear gate open.

– CONTINUED –

Shopping bag hook

321

Interior equipment

(324,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& To remove the cover housing

S06AK02

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right, to

shorten the length of the cover.

3. Remove it from the retainer.

& Stowage of the cargo area

cover

S06AK04

The cargo area cover can be stowed in

under the cargo floor.

1 Straps

1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo

floor board.

2. Shorten the cargo area cover, then

stow it under the cargo area floor.

3. Put the cargo floor board back.

NOTE

To stow, insert the right end of the

cover into the recess of floor. To take it

out, lift up the left end of the cover, then

pull it out from the recess.

Cargo area cover

322

(325,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& To install the cover housing

S06AK05

1 Cargo cover inner housing

2 Cargo cover outer housing

3 Cargo cover button

1. Hold the cover inner housing and outer

housing. Press the cover housing

button and lengthen the cover housing.

2. Shorten the cover housing.

3. Insert both ends of the cover housing

into the recesses of the retainers.

NOTE

Store the window-side seatbelt in the

holder before using the cover housing.

6-14. Cargo tie-down hooks

S06AM

The cargo area is equipped with several

tie-down hooks so that cargo can be

secured with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn them

down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that ex-

ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The

maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10

kg) per hook.

Cargo tie-down hooks

323

Interior equipment

(326,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

6-15. Under-floor storage

compartment

S06AN

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the under-

floor storage compartment

closed while driving to reduce

the risk of injury in the event of

sudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the under-floor storage

compartment.

1 Straps

The under-floor storage compartment is

located under the floor of the cargo area

and can be used to store small items. To

open the lid, pull the tab and keep the lid

using the strap on the seatback.

6-16. Surround View Monitor

(if equipped)

S06BJ

Surround View Monitor is a feature that

displays camera images on the center

information display to allow the driver to

check the blind spots of the vehicle. You

can use it to check the area in the front of

the vehicle, when starting the vehicle or

while driving, and the area to the rear of the

vehicle, when backing up. You can also

use it to check your surroundings when

parking the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never rely on only the Surround

View Monitor when driving the

vehicle. The image on the moni-

tor screen may appear different

from the vehicle’s actual sur-

roundings. If you drive the vehi-

cle by viewing only the monitor

image, a collision or an accident

may occur. When driving the

vehicle, always remain alert and

the check the surrounding traffic

directly and by using the mirrors.

. Do not use the Surround View

Monitor in the following situa-

tions.

– You are driving on a dirt road

Under-floor storage compartment

324

(327,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

or a road covered in snow.

– The camera malfunctions (e.g.

the lens or bracket is broken).

– The outside mirrors are re-

tracted.

– The front door is not fully

closed.

. If the outside temperature is low,

the monitor screen may become

dark or the image may become

dim. In particular, the image of a

moving object may appear dis-

torted or disappear from the

screen. Always remain alert and

check the surrounding traffic di-

rectly when driving.

NOTE

If there is a Surround View Monitor

system malfunction, an error message

“

” or “ ” is displayed on the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Malfunctions of the center information

display” �P473.

& How to change the display of

Surround View Monitor

S06BJ01

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, you can operate the select lever

and the view monitor switch to display the

image on the Surround View Monitor.

1 View monitor switch

1 View icon

! Checking your surroundings while

the vehicle is stopped

S06BJ0101

To display a 3D view of the vehicle’s

surroundings, press the view monitor

switch when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

– CONTINUED –

Surround View Monitor

325

Interior equipment

(328,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Vehicle icon

2 Vehicle angle icon

When the 3D view is displayed, the display

angle switches clockwise from the starting

position. When the view returns to the

starting position, the display angle stops

switching. You can also switch the display

angle by touching the vehicle angle icon on

the screen.

NOTE

If you turn off the Surround View

Monitor or change the screen to oper-

ate other functions, the next time the

image is displayed, it will be displayed

at the previously displayed angle.

! Checking the rearward

S06BJ0102

When the select lever is move to “R”, the

image in the rearward direction is dis-

played. Pressing the view monitor switch

or touching the view icon while the image

of the rear camera is displayed will switch

the screen view.

1 Original screen

2 Rear view screen/Top view screen/Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) screen

3 Rear view screen/Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) screen

4 Top view screen

: Shift the select lever.

: Touch the view icon or press the view

Surround View Monitor

326

(329,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

monitor switch.

NOTE

. If you turn off the Surround View

Monitor or use it to operate another

function, the next time the image is

displayed, the previously displayed

screen will be shown. However, if the

top view screen is displayed at that

time, the next time the monitor

image is displayed, the rear view

screen/Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) screen will be shown.

. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”

is on, the rear-view image will be

displayed on the center information

display for a certain period of time

after the select lever is shifted from

the “R” position to another position

(other than the “P” position). To turn

the function on and off, refer to

“General settings” �P213.

! Checking the front

S06BJ0103

When the view monitor switch is pressed

while the select lever is in the “N” or “D”

position, the front view is displayed.

1 Original screen

2 Top view screen

3 Left-side view screen/Right-side view

screen/Front-top view screen

4 Front view screen/Front-top view screen

: Press the view monitor switch.

: Touch the view icon.

NOTE

If you turn off the Surround View

Monitor or use it to operate another

function, the next time the image is

displayed, the previously displayed

screen will be shown.

& How to cancel Surround View

Monitor

S06BJ02

There are several ways to cancel Sur-

round View Monitor.

! Manual cancellation

S06BJ0201

The Surround View Monitor will be can-

celed by either of the following operations.

. Press the view monitor switch until the

original screen is displayed (when the

select lever is other than the “R”

position).

. Move the select lever to a position other

than the “R” position (when the select

lever is in the “R” position).

. Touch

(car settings icon).

. Touch

(HOME).

. Touch

(driver profiles icon).

! Automatic cancellation

S06BJ0202

If any of the following conditions are met,

the Surround View Monitor is canceled

automatically.

– CONTINUED –

Surround View Monitor

327

Interior equipment

(330,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. When the select lever is other than in

the “R” position

– About 3 minutes have elapsed since

you pressed the view monitor switch

to access the Surround View Moni-

tor.

. When the select lever is not in the “R” or

“P” position

– The vehicle accelerates to 13 mph

(20 km/h) or more.

– You depress the brake pedal and

pull up the parking brake switch to

apply the parking brake.

. When the select lever is in the “D” or “R”

position

– The select lever is shifted to the “P”

position.

& How to view the camera

images

S06BJ03

1 Cameras

The camera image displays guiding lines

that provide information on the distance

and direction of travel of your vehicle, as

well as information on any vehicles you are

approaching.

CAUTION

. When you drive the vehicle, do

not rely only on the guiding lines.

Make sure that you check your

surroundings directly.

. The position and other informa-

tion provided by the guiding lines

may differ from the actual dis-

tance of objects from the vehicle

if it is tilting at an angle relative to

the road surface due to the num-

ber of passengers or the distribu-

tion of cargo on board the vehi-

cle.

NOTE

. Top view and rear view only: The

display of the predicted course line

linked to the steering angle can be

turned on/off by operating “Steering

Angle Lines” in the center informa-

tion display. To turn the function on

and off, refer to “General settings”

�P213.

. The camera image may be hard to

see in the following situations. This

Surround View Monitor

328

(331,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

is not a malfunction.

– Vehicle surroundings are dark

(such as at night).

– Ambient temperature outside the

vehicle is high or low.

– There is water or humidity on the

lens (such as in rainy weather).

– There is foreign material (such as

mud) on or near the camera.

– Sunlight or a headlight beam

shines directly shines toward

the camera lens.

. Under an artificial light such as a

fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor

lamp or mercury lamp, the lighted

portion may appear to flicker (flicker

phenomenon).

. When the display is cold, the image

may leave traces or become darker

than usual, causing a difficulty in

viewing the screen. When driving

your vehicle, make sure that you

check your surroundings directly for

traffic.

. The following conditions may affect

the appearance of the screen, but

any resulting image distortion on the

screen does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

– When humidity is high on a rainy

day, the camera lens becomes

foggy.

– When driving at night, the light

from a vehicle or building located

ahead shines in the direction of

the camera.

– When the vehicle is in a dark

place or when driving at night, the

camera image may be adjusted to

make image noise less visible.

Therefore, the image may look like a

monochromatic image or the image

colors may differ from the actual

colors. The image sharpness in the

center and in the four corners of the

screen may differ. This is not a

malfunction.

! 3D view

S06BJ0301

1 Vehicle icon

2 Vehicle angle icon

The 3D view displays the area around the

vehicle.

! Top view

S06BJ0302

1 Vehicle icon

2 Predicted course line*

*: When the select lever is in the “R” position.

The top view displays an image of the

vehicle’s surroundings from above the

vehicle. This view is useful for checking

the vehicle’s surroundings when you are

driving.

– CONTINUED –

Surround View Monitor

329

Interior equipment

(332,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Front view

S06BJ0303

1 Guiding lines

The guiding lines that indicate the width

and the front end of your vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

! Side view

S06BJ0304

1 Front-of-vehicle guiding line

2 Side-of-vehicle guiding line

3 Center-of-front-tire guiding line

Guiding lines that indicate the width and

the front end of the vehicle are displayed

on the monitor.

! Rear view

S06BJ0305

1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (green

horizontal line)

4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

6 Vehicle centerline

7 Dynamic guidelines

The help lines are a guide to help you

judge distances based on the screen

image.

Surround View Monitor

330

(333,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Range of Surround View

Monitor

S06BJ04

A Camera to be used

B Range of displayed image

1 Front camera

2 Side camera (right-hand side)

3 Rear camera

4 Side camera (left-hand side)

5 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the vehicle

6 Vehicle overall length

7 Approx. 8 ft (2.5 m) from the vehicle

8 Vehicle overall width

WARNING

The range that can be viewed with

the camera is limited. Always make

sure that you check your surround-

ings directly when the vehicle is in

motion and proceed slowly. If you do

not, it may cause an accident or

injury.

NOTE

. The range of the displayed image

may differ depending on the status

of your vehicle or of the road sur-

face.

. Because the Surround View Monitor

system uses a specially designed

lens, the sense of distance in the

displayed image is different from the

actual distance.

& Using the camera

S06BJ05

CAUTION

Obey the following instructions to

prevent a system malfunction.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the camera such as by hitting it

with an object. Striking the cam-

era can change the mounting

angle.

. The camera unit is a waterproof

structure. Do not attempt to re-

move, disassemble or modify the

unit.

. Do not vigorously rub the camera

lens or polish it using a hard

brush or abrasive compounds.

The lens may be scratched,

which can affect the camera im-

age.

. The camera lens is made of glass

or plastic. Do not allow any

organic solvent, body wax, oil

film remover or glass coating

agent to become attached on the

lens surface. If any becomes

attached, remove it immediately.

. Do not expose the camera lens to

any sudden temperature change

such as spraying hot water on it

in cold weather.

. Do not apply the water jet of a

high pressure washer to the cam-

era or the surrounding area when

cleaning the vehicle. The force of

the water pressure can dislodge

the camera. Also, water may

enter inside the camera and

cause a malfunction.

. If the camera is exposed to any

impact, it can lead to a malfunc-

tion. Have the camera inspected

by your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

– CONTINUED –

Surround View Monitor

331

Interior equipment

(334,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Do not use a steam cleaner under

any circumstances. Some types

of steam cleaners inject hot

steam.

. The camera surface may be da-

maged by a flying stone.

NOTE

If the camera lens is covered in dirt, the

system will not be able to produce a

sharp image. If there is foreign material

on the camera, such as water drops,

snow or mud, clean it with water and

wipe away any moisture with a soft

cloth. If the camera is heavily soiled,

wash it using a neutral detergent.

6-17. Rear view camera

S06AW

A rear view camera is attached to the rear

gate. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position and the select lever is set to

“R”, the rear view camera automatically

displays the rear view image behind the

vehicle on the center information display.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera uses a

wide-angle lens, the image on the

monitor is different from the

actual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image on

the monitor is limited, always

check the rear view and the

surrounding area with your eyes

and mirrors, and move backward

at a slow speed. Moving back-

ward only by checking the rear

view image from the camera

could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify the

camera, switch or wiring. If

smoke comes out or you smell a

strange odor, stop using the rear

view camera immediately. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection. Continued use may

result in accident, fire or electric

shock.

CAUTION

. When washing your vehicle with

a high-pressure washer, do not

allow water to touch the camera

directly. Entry of water in the

camera lens may result in con-

densation, malfunction, fire or

electric shock.

. Since the camera is a precision

device, do not subject it to strong

impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,

fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or is

frozen on the camera, you must

be very careful when removing it.

Rear view camera

332

(335,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Otherwise, damage to the camera

may cause a fire or electric

shock. Pour water or lukewarm

water over the camera to remove

mud and ice, and wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to the

camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-

mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sure

to use a fuse with the specified

rating. Use of a fuse with a

different rating may result in a

malfunction.

. If you use the rear view camera

for a long time while the engine is

not operated, the battery may

become completely discharged.

NOTE

. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,

benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,

discoloration may occur. To remove

contamination, wipe the camera with

a cloth moistened with a diluted

neutral detergent. Then wipe it with

a soft, dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the camera. If

it comes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a diluted

neutral detergent to remove the wax.

. The camera lens has a hard coating

to help prevent scratches. However,

when washing the vehicle or clean-

ing the camera lens, be careful not to

scratch the camera lens. Do not use

a washing brush directly on the

camera lens. The image quality of

the rear view camera may deterio-

rate.

. Strong light shined on the camera

lens may develop vertical lines

around the light source. This is not

a malfunction.

. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-

play may flicker. However, this is not

a malfunction.

. The image of the rear view camera

may be slightly different from the

actual color of the objects.

. If there is a malfunction on the center

information display, refer to “Mal-

functions of the center information

display” �P473.

& How to use the rear view

camera

S06AW02

When the select lever is set to “R”, the rear

view camera automatically displays the

rear view image from the vehicle. When

the lever is set to other positions, the

image before setting to “R” is displayed.

1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Set the select lever to “R”.

NOTE

. The image of the rear view camera is

horizontally reversed as is the case

with the vehicle inside mirror or the

outside mirror.

. When “Rear Camera Delay Control”

is on, the rear view image will be

displayed on the center information

display for a certain period of time

after the select lever is shifted to a

position other than the “P” position

from “R”. To turn the function on and

off, refer to “General settings”

�P213.

. It may be difficult to see the image of

the rear view camera in the following

cases. This is not a malfunction of

the camera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (at

night, in a tunnel, etc.).

– The vehicle is in an extremely hot

or cold place.

– An object (such as raindrops,

snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the

view of the rear view camera

sticks to the lens of the camera.

– Strong light is shining directly on

the camera lens (occasionally,

– CONTINUED –

Rear view camera

333

Interior equipment

(336,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

there are vertical lines on the

screen).

& Viewing range on the screen

S06AW03

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with

the rear view camera is limited.

Always be sure to check with your

eyes when moving backward and

proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may

cause an accident or injury.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper

can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper

cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view camera

looks shorter than the actual distance.

Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot be

viewed. If there is an object that has a wide

Rear view camera

334

(337,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

projection on its upper part such as a sign

pole behind the vehicle, the projection

cannot be seen on the screen.

& Help lines

S06AW04

The help lines are a guide to help you

realize the actual distance from the screen

image.

NOTE

If you shift to the “R” range within

several seconds after turning on the

ignition switch, the warning message

may not be displayed. Wait for several

seconds after turning on the ignition

switch before shifting to the “R” range.

Then, the warning message will be

displayed.

Help lines

1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)

2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)

3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (green

horizontal line)

4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)

5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

6 Vehicle centerline

7 Dynamic guidelines

When the select lever is set to “R”, the

monitor screen displays the help lines

together with the rear view image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, always

check the back with your eyes

without relying on the help lines.

Otherwise, it may cause an acci-

dent or injury.

. The actual position may be differ-

ent from the indication of the help

lines.

. Differences may occur due to the

number of passengers or the

loaded cargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope or

inclined against the road, the

indication is different from the

actual position.

NOTE

When “Steering Angle Lines” is off, the

dynamic guidelines will be disappear

on the center information display. To

turn the dynamic guidelines on and off,

refer to “General settings” �P213.

! Difference between screen image

and actual road

S06AW0401

The distance markers show the distance

for a level road when the vehicle is not

loaded. It may be different from the actual

distance depending on the loading condi-

tions or road conditions.

– CONTINUED –

Rear view camera

335

Interior equipment

(338,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! When there is an upward slope at

the back

S06AW040101

1 3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance.

! When there is a downward slope

at the back

S06AW040102

1 3 ft (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearer

than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view

distance on the screen looks farther

than the actual distance as in an

upward slope.

! Feature of distance marker

S06AW0402

1 3 ft (1 m) line

2 10 ft (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distance

on the road. If there is a car or another

object close behind, distance cannot be

correctly displayed.

Rear view camera

336

(339,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(340,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(341,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S07

7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 341

Fuel requirements............................................... 341

Fuel filler lid and cap .......................................... 342

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)................. 346

7-3. Preparing to drive........................................... 347

7-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models

without push-button start system) .............. 348

Starting engine ................................................... 348

Stopping the engine ...........................................349

Steering lock ...................................................... 349

7-5. Starting and stopping engine (models

with push-button start system).................... 350

Safety precautions.............................................. 350

Operating range for push-button start system .....350

Starting engine ................................................... 350

Stopping engine .................................................352

When access key fob does not operate

properly............................................................352

Steering lock ...................................................... 353

7-6. Remote engine start system (dealer

option)............................................................ 353

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) ..............354

Alternate operation method for models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”............................................................357

Entering the vehicle while it is running via

remote start (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”) ........................ 357

Entering the vehicle while it is running via

remote start (models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”) ........................ 358

Entering the vehicle following remote engine

start shutdown................................................. 358

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of

the vehicle ....................................................... 358

Remote transmitter program (Remote engine

starter transceiver)........................................... 358

System maintenance .......................................... 359

Certification for remote engine starter ................ 360

7-7. Continuously variable transmission ..............361

Continuously variable transmission features ...... 361

Select lever........................................................ 362

Selection of manual mode .................................. 363

Shift lock function.............................................. 365

Driving tips ........................................................ 366

7-8. Power steering.................................................366

Power steering warning light .............................. 366

Power steering system features ......................... 366

7-9. Braking .............................................................367

Braking tips ....................................................... 367

Brake system..................................................... 368

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 369

7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .....................369

ABS self-check .................................................. 370

ABS warning light .............................................. 370

7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system.................................................370

If EBD system malfunctions ............................... 370

7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...............371

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 372

To turn on/off the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system............................................................. 372

Starting and operating

(342,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7-13. X-MODE ......................................................... 373

To activate/deactivate X-MODE............................ 374

Hill descent control function ............................... 376

7-14. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models)....................................... 377

7-15. Parking your vehicle..................................... 378

Electronic parking brake ..................................... 378

Parking tips........................................................ 383

7-16. Hill start assist system................................. 384

7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped) ............................... 386

System features.................................................. 386

System operation ............................................... 389

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

buzzer .............................................................. 390

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator .................................... 392

BSD/RCTA warning indicator...............................392

To turn on/off the BSD/RCTA............................... 393

Certification for the BSD/RCTA............................ 393

Handling of radar sensors ..................................394

7-18. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system (if equipped) ..................................... 395

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

overview .......................................................... 396

Operating conditions.......................................... 398

Sonar Audible Alarm function............................. 401

Automatic Braking function operation ................ 403

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system operation ................................... 405

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

ON/OFF setting ................................................ 405

RAB warning indicator ....................................... 406

Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 406

7-19. Driver Monitoring System (if equipped) ......407

User recognition function ................................... 411

Inattentive/drowsy driving warning ..................... 413

Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning ....... 414

Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 415

Registering and deleting a user.......................... 417

Registering and deleting driver position

personalization ................................................ 417

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF settings......... 417

How to get the source code using the Open

Source ............................................................. 418

Starting and operating

(343,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7-1. Fuel

S07AA

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low in

quality or use of an inappropriate

fuel additive may cause damage

to the engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularly

those in high altitude areas, offer

fuels posted as regular octane

gasoline with an octane rating

below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of

those fuels is not recommended.

& Fuel requirements

S07AA01

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

NOTE

When towing a trailer, SUBARU recom-

mends using unleaded gasoline with an

octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) or

higher to reduce the risk of engine

overheat.

! Fuel octane rating

S07AA0103

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating

can cause persistent and heavy knocking,

which can damage the engine. Do not be

concerned if your vehicle sometimes

knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or

when you accelerate. Contact your

SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the

specified octane rating and your vehicle

knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

S07AA010301

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

! AKI

S07AA010302

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

S07AA0104

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Reformulated gasoline

S07AA0128

SUBARU supports the use of reformulated

gasoline when available. Reformulated

gasoline has been blended to burn more

cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

! MMT

S07AA0106

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-

cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-

pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU dealer for service. If it is deter-

mined that the condition is caused by the

type of fuel used, repairs may not be

covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

S07AA0107

Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-

ditives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system working

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high-quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your

vehicle, but should contain no more than

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

341

Starting and operating

(344,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

15% ethanol for the proper operation of

your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 15% ethanol, including from any

pump labeled, E30, E50 or E85 (which are

only some examples of fuel containing

more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station op-

erators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following description.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that speci-

fied in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gaso-

line. Methanol can be used in your

vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5%

of the fuel mixture AND if it is accom-

panied by sufficient quantities of the

proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-

tors required to prevent damage to the

fuel system. Do not use fuel containing

methanol EXCEPT under these condi-

tions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may

be fuel related, try a different brand of

gasoline before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel

may damage the paint, be sure to

wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled fuel

is not covered under the SUBARU

Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

S07AA02

! Locations of the fuel filler lid

S07AA0202

! Refueling

S07AA0201

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Before refueling, stop the vehicle, then

turn off the ignition switch to turn off all

the electrical components. At this time,

the fuel filler lid also unlocks.

NOTE

When you lock the door, the fuel filler

lid also locks. To unlock the fuel filler

Fuel

342

(345,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

lid, perform one of the operations

below.

– Press the unlock button on the

key fob.

– Press the unlock side of the

power door locking switch.

2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

3. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.

Open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any sta-

tic electricity that may be present on

your body. If your body is carrying

an electrostatic charge, there is a

possibility that an electric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1 Open

2 Close

4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and

then close all vehicle doors and

windows. Make sure that there

are no lighted cigarettes, open

flames or electrical sparks in the

adjacent area. Only handle fuel

outdoors. Quickly wipe up any

spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

Do not remove the cap quickly.

Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck,

especially in hot weather. If you

hear a hissing sound while you

are removing the cap, wait for the

sound to stop and then slowly

open the cap to prevent fuel from

spraying out and creating a fire

hazard.

5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

– CONTINUED –

Fuel

343

Starting and operating

(346,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-

matic stop mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add

any more fuel.

7. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-

wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be

certain not to catch the tether under the

cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted

surface, rinse it off immediately.

Otherwise, the painted surface

could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel

filler lid is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to

“CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light” �P178.

. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one

of the operations below. However if

these operations are performed

when the fuel filler lid is open, the

fuel filler lid will not lock when it is

subsequently closed.

– Press the lock/arm button on the

key fob.

– Press the lock side of the power

door locking switch.

. When the doors are locked or un-

locked using the automatic door

lock system, the fuel filler lid will be

locked or unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could oc-

cur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

Fuel

344

(347,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

as a result of an empty tank could

cause damage to the engine.

Continuing to operate your vehi-

cle at an extremely low fuel level

may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened

S07AA0203

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to

malfunction or a dead battery, it can be

opened from the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the right-

side of the cargo area trim using a flat-

head screwdriver.

1 Clip

2. Remove the orange knob from the clip.

3. Pull the orange knob, then the fuel filler

lid will be unlocked.

4. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

5. The fuel filler lid will open slightly.

Then, open it further by hand.

Fuel

345

Starting and operating

(348,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7-2. State emission testing

(U.S. only)

S07AB

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single

two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in uncon-

trolled vehicle movement and may

cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s emission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspection

of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/

malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an

examination of the OBDII system with

an electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is

observed, there are no stored diagnos-

tic trouble codes, and the OBDII readi-

ness monitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is

not properly operating (light is illumi-

nated or is not working due to faulty

LED [Light Emitting Diode]) or there is

one or more diagnostic trouble codes

stored in the vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number

of OBDII system readiness monitors

“NOT READY” is greater than one. If

the vehicle’s battery has been recently

replaced or disconnected, the OBDII

system inspection may indicate that the

vehicle is not ready for the emission

test. Under this condition, the vehicle

driver should be instructed to drive his/

her vehicle for a few days to reset the

readiness monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU dealer

for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

State emission testing (U.S. only)

346

(349,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from the portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

7-3. Preparing to drive

S07AC

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seat-

belts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment or under the vehicle

before starting the engine.

NOTE

. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake

fluid, washer fluid and other fluid

levels should be checked daily,

weekly or at fuel stops.

. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-

ler hitch (dealer option)” �P437

Preparing to drive

347

Starting and operating

(350,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7-4. Starting and stopping the

engine (models without push-

button start system)

S07BD

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds or

more before trying again.

NOTE

It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

& Starting engine

S07BD01

! General precautions when starting

engine

S07BD0105

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle (except when

using the remote engine start

system). It may result in an acci-

dent.

. Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flammable

substances. The exhaust pipe

and exhaust emissions can cre-

ate a fire hazard at high tempera-

tures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped while

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-

eration immediately after the engine

has started.

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel and the usage condition (re-

peated driving of a distance in which

the engine has not warmed up

sufficiently). In such a case, it is

recommended that you change to a

different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine

when the accelerator is operated

rapidly such as a rapid start-up and

a rapid acceleration. This is not a

malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and

rear window defogger are turned off.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

starter is cranking.

Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)

348

(351,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably the “P” position).

The starter motor will only operate

when the select lever is at the “P” or

“N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” �P174.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accel-

erator pedal. Release the key immedi-

ately after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait

for at least 10 seconds. After

checking that the parking brake is

firmly set, turn the ignition switch to

the “START” position while depres-

sing the accelerator pedal slightly

(approximately a quarter of the full

stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait

for at least 10 seconds. Then fully

depress the accelerator pedal and

turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position. If the engine

starts, quickly release the accel-

erator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. After wait-

ing for 10 seconds or longer, turn

the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start,

contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine

has started. The fuel injection system

automatically lowers the idle speed as

the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure

that the select lever is in the “P” or “N”

position and that the parking brake is

applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P” position.

& Stopping the engine

S07BD02

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion on the ignition switch, causing

the steering wheel to lock.

& Steering lock

S07BD07

After stopping the engine and the key is

removed from ignition switch, the steering

wheel will be locked due to the steering

lock function.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)

349

Starting and operating

(352,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

S07BD0701

When you cannot unlock the steering

wheel, perform the following steps.

1. Check that the parking brake is ap-

plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position while turning the steering

wheel left and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by

doing the steps, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

7-5. Starting and stopping

engine (models with push-

button start system)

S07BE

& Safety precautions

S07BE06

Refer to “Safety precautions” �P120.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

S07BE01

Refer to “Operating range for push-button

start system” �P168.

& Starting engine

S07BE03

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “Starting engine”

�P348.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be a

malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch is flashing in

green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. Depress the brake

pedal while moving the steering

wheel to the right and left, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

. Do not continue pushing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop push-

ing the push-button ignition

switch. Instead, press the push-

button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to

switch the power status to

“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then

push the push-button ignition

switch to start the engine.

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

350

(353,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

. After the engine starts, the engine

speed will be kept high.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the engine starter

operates for a maximum of 10 sec-

onds. After starting the engine, the

starter stops automatically.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the brake pedal, the engine can be

started regardless of the status of

the push-button ignition switch.

. If the security indicator light illumi-

nates when you attempt to start the

engine but the engine does not start,

press the push-button ignition

switch to switch the power to

“OFF” and then try to start the

engine again.

. If the engine does not start, press the

push-button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to switch

the power to “OFF”. Then, while

depressing the brake pedal more

forcefully, press the push-button

ignition switch.

. The engine start procedures may not

function depending on the radio

wave conditions around the vehicle.

In such a case, refer to “Starting

engine” �P471.

. It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for main-

tenance or other purposes). This

difficulty is caused by the electro-

nically controlled throttle’s self-di-

agnosis function. To overcome it,

keep the ignition switch in the “ON”

position for approximately 10 sec-

onds before starting the engine.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the steering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

starter is cranking.

1 Operation indicator

2 Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the brake pedal,

the engine will start. The starting proce-

dure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position. The engine can also start

when the select lever is in the “N”

position, however, for safety reasons,

start in the “P” position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When

starting with the select lever in the “N”

position, the indicator does not turn

green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-

button ignition switch will not turn

green even when the select lever is

in the “P” position.

. In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure,

move the select lever to the “P”

position, and switch the power to

– CONTINUED –

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

351

Starting and operating

(354,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

“ACC”. Depress the brake pedal,

and press the push-button ignition

switch for at least 15 seconds. The

engine may start. Only use this

engine start procedure in case of

emergency.

. When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-

button ignition switch turns green,

and press the push-button ignition

switch to start the engine.

& Stopping engine

S07BE04

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will

be switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake

booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required

on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater force

will be required to steer, and it

may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

. If you press the push-button ignition

switch while driving, the emergency

engine stop interrupt screen alerts

the driver by messages on the

combination meter display (color

LCD) and beeps.

. Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine dur-

ing driving except in an emergency.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

S07BE05

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” �P470.

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

352

(355,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Steering lock

S07BE07

After stopping the engine and any door

including the rear gate is opened, the

steering wheel will be locked due to the

steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steering

lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be

released

S07BE0701

1 Operation indicator

2 Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due to

the steering lock, check the status of

operation indicator and perform the follow-

ing steps.

! Operation indicator flashing in

green

S07BE070101

1. Check that the select lever is set in the

“P” position.

2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

while turning the steering wheel left

and right.

! Operation indicator flashing in

orange

S07BE070102

There may be a malfunction in the steering

lock function. Immediately contact your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-6. Remote engine start

system (dealer option)

S07AZ

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General precau-

tions when starting engine”

�P348.

. Do not remote start a vehicle in an

enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a motor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of carbon monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you

to start the engine from outside the vehicle.

In addition, the remote engine start system

can activate the heater or air conditioner,

providing you with a comfortable cabin

upon entry. For more details, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

– CONTINUED –

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

353

Starting and operating

(356,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

mote engine start system.

NOTE

. The length of time for which it is

acceptable to allow the engine to

remain idling may be bound by local

laws and regulations. Check the

local rules when using the remote

engine start system.

. When taking your vehicle in for

service, it is recommended that you

inform the service personnel that

your vehicle is equipped with a

remote engine start system.

& Remote engine starter trans-

ceiver (fob)

S07AZ21

1 Fob button

! Starting the engine

S07AZ2101

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate)

and the engine hood must be closed

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. Any open entry point will

prevent starting or cause the engine to

stop. For models with push-button start

system, doors must also be locked

prior to remote engine start activation.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the start

request is received, the following will

occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps once.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps twice.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following will

occur.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

. The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a vehicle

malfunction is preventing starting. If the

engine does not start after 3 additional

attempts, the remote engine start request

will be aborted.

! Stopping the engine

S07AZ2102

Press and hold the fob button for at least 3

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

354

(357,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Remote start safety features

S07AZ2103

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the following

conditions is detected. In addition, the fob

will flash and beep 3 times.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes.

. The brake pedal is depressed.

. A key is in the ignition switch.

. The engine hood is open.

. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

rpm.

. The security alarm is triggered.

. The select lever is not in the “P”

position.

If the system detects any door (including

the rear gate) open during operation, it will

prevent starting or stop the engine (for

models without push-button start system),

and sound the horn and flash side marker

lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, if the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

. If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activa-

tion (the security indicator light on

the combination meter is flashing),

the alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run

cycle.

. If the alarm system is disarmed at

the time of remote engine starter

activation (the security indicator

light on the combination meter is

not flashing), the alarm system will

remain disarmed throughout the

remote start run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con-

firmation

S07AZ2104

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate status of the system

using the following flash and beep se-

quences, provided the fob is within opera-

tional range of the system.

– CONTINUED –

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

355

Starting and operating

(358,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Precondition

Fob Indication

Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed

Continuous while button is

held down

— The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

Engine idling by remote engine start operation

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety

reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and

holding fob button for at least 3 sec

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —

Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

356

(359,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Alternate operation method

for models with “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”

S07AZ22

Access key fob

1 Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the

remote engine start transmitter. Operate

the lock button to start or stop the engine

as follows.

! Before starting the engine

S07AZ2201

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position.

. All doors including the rear gate are

closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position.

! When starting the engine

S07AZ2202

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash

once and the keyless buzzer chirps

once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button

briefly again. The hazard warning

flashers then flash once again, and

the keyless buzzer chirps once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard

warning flashers then flash three

times, and the horn will honk once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

! When stopping the engine

S07AZ2203

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

! Remote start safety features

S07AZ2204

For detailed information, refer to “Remote

start safety features” �P355.

& Entering the vehicle while it is

running via remote start

(models without “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”)

S07AZ03

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”

�P144.

– Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn it to the “ON”

position.

– Press any button on the remote

keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut

down when any door or rear gate is

opened.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “START” position to

restart the engine.

– CONTINUED –

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

357

Starting and operating

(360,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Entering the vehicle while it is

running via remote start

(models with “keyless access

with push-button start sys-

tem”)

S07AZ24

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function and remote

keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked

manually using the key, the vehicle’s

alarm system will trigger (if the alarm

system is armed prior to activating the

remote engine start system) and the

engine will turn off. Perform either of

the following procedures to disarm the

alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”

�P144.

– Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

– Press any button on the access

key fob.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will

remain running provided the access

key fob is present and detected by the

vehicle.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

once while depressing the brake pedal

before driving your vehicle. The remote

engine starter transceiver (fob) will

flash and beep 3 times to indicate that

the remote start system has been shut

down.

& Entering the vehicle following

remote engine start shut-

down

S07AZ10

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by the remote keyless entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

S07AZ04

After the system starts the engine, the

heater or air conditioning will activate and

heat or cool the interior to a set interior

temperature of 728F (228C), with auto-

matic selected for all other settings.

& Remote transmitter program

(Remote engine starter

transceiver)

S07AZ13

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain open throughout the

entire process).

2. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, then back to “ON”

again and leave the ignition “ON”

throughout the programming process.

3. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating

that the system has entered the trans-

mitter learn mode.

4. Press and release the “

” button on

the transmitter that you want to pro-

gram.

5. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that

the system has learned the transmitter.

Upon successful programming, the

remote start confirmation transmitter

button will flash one time.

6. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept

up to eight transmitters).

7. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

358

(361,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

closed or after 2 minutes.

& System maintenance

S07AZ09

NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected,

it will be necessary to start the vehicle a

minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. This is required to allow

the vehicle electronic systems to re-

synchronize.

! Changing the battery

S07AZ0901

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the re-

mote engine start transmitter

when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if

an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.

. Battery should not be exposed to

excessive heat such as sunshine,

fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing battery of access key fob” �P522.

For remote engine starter transceiver:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)

supplied in your remote engine start

transmitter should last approximately one

year, depending on usage. When the

battery begin to weaken, you will notice a

decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side lower left corner

of the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small

flat-head screwdriver.

– CONTINUED –

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

359

Starting and operating

(362,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove

the battery and replace with new one.

Be sure to observe the (+) sign on the

old battery before removing it to ensure

that the new battery is inserted prop-

erly (battery “+” should be pointed

away from the transmitter circuit board

on battery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw

and test the remote engine start

system.

& Certification for remote en-

gine starter

S07AZ23

! U.S.-spec. models

S07AZ2301

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

! Canada-spec. models

S07AZ2302

Remote engine start system (dealer option)

360

(363,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7-7. Continuously variable

transmission

S07BG

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Observe the following precau-

tions. Otherwise, the transmis-

sion could be damaged.

– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-

tion only after the vehicle has

completely stopped.

– Do not shift from the “D”

position into the “R” position

or vice versa until the vehicle

has completely stopped.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle as fol-

lows. Doing so may result in an

unexpected accident or malfunc-

tion.

– Moving rearward by inertia

with the select lever set in a

forward driving position.

– Moving forward by inertia with

the select lever set in the “R”

position.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for a

long time with the select lever in

any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

& Continuously variable trans-

mission features

S07BG06

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

shift at higher engine speeds than

when the coolant temperature is

sufficiently high in order to shorten

the warm-up time and improve dri-

veability. The gearshift timing will

automatically shift to the normal

timing after the engine has warmed

up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalida-

tion of data which the on-board

computer has collected and stored

in memory to allow the transmission

to shift at the most appropriate times

for the current condition of your

vehicle. Optimized shifting will be

restored as the vehicle continues to

be driven for a while.

. When driving under continuous hea-

vy load conditions such as when

towing a camper or climbing a long,

steep hill, the engine speed or the

vehicle speed may automatically be

reduced. This is not a malfunction.

This results from the engine control

function maintaining the cooling

performance of the vehicle. The

engine and vehicle speed will return

to a normal speed when the engine is

able to maintain the optimum cool-

ing performance after the heavy load

decreases. Driving under a heavy

load must be performed with ex-

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission

361

Starting and operating

(364,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

treme care. Do not try to pass a

vehicle in front when driving on an

uphill slope while towing.

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that

provides superior transmission effi-

ciency for maximum fuel economy.

At times, depending on varying

driving conditions, a chain operat-

ing sound may be heard that is

characteristic of this type of system.

& Select lever

S07BG01

! Select lever positions

S07BG0105

1 Select lever button

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button

in.

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in.

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button.

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has the “M” position

for using the manual mode.

NOTE

. For some models, to protect the

engine while the select lever is in

the “P” or “N” position, the engine is

controlled so that the engine speed

may not become too high even if the

accelerator pedal is depressed hard.

. When you change the select lever

position, make sure to move the

select lever firmly to the selected

position.

! P (Park)

S07BG0101

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake firmly, then shift to the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P”

position to any other position, you should

depress the brake pedal fully then move

the select lever. This prevents the vehicle

from lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

S07BG0102

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “ACC” position, the movement of the

select lever from the “N” to “R” position is

only possible by depressing the brake

pedal. For details, refer to “Shift lock

function” �P365.

Continuously variable transmission

362

(365,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! N (Neutral)

S07BG0103

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” position.

Engine braking has no effect in this

condition and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

! D (Drive)

S07BG0104

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration you

require. Also, while driving up and down a

hill, the transmission assists and controls

the driving performance and engine brak-

ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift.

In this case, the transmission will operate

like a conventional automatic transmis-

sion. When you release the pedal, the

transmission will return to the original gear

position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the

steering wheel is operated while driving in

the “D” position, the transmission will

temporarily switch to the manual mode.

In this mode, you can shift to any gear

position using the shift paddles. For details

about the manual mode, refer to “Selection

of manual mode” �P363. Once the

vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission

will switch from the manual mode back to

the “D” position for normal driving.

& Selection of manual mode

S07BG02

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission

363

Starting and operating

(366,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Upshift indicator

2 Downshift indicator

3 Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the

currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th-

gear range. The upshift and downshift

indicators show when a gear shift is

possible. When the upshift indicator “

”

illuminates, upshifting is possible. When

the downshift indicator “

” illuminates,

downshifting is possible. When both in-

dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-

shifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals) the gear will be automatically

shifted to the 1st position and the down-

shift indicator will turn off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the “M”

position.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on the

shift paddles. Doing so may result in

accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when the

engine speed is too high, i.e., when a

downshift would push the tach-

ometer needle beyond the red zone,

beeps will be emitted to warn you

that the downshift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the trans-

mission will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operat-

ing the shift paddle twice in rapid

succession.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT

OIL TEMP” warning light on the

combination meter will illuminate.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe location and let the engine idle

until the warning light turns off.

Continuously variable transmission

364

(367,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Shift lock function

S07BG04

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position

before the brake pedal is depressed.

Depress the brake pedal first, and then

operate the select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the ignition switch from the “ACC”

position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position

and remove the key from the ignition

switch.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“ACC” position while the select lever is

in the “N” position, the select lever may

not be moved to the “P” position without

depressing the brake pedal and press-

ing the select lever button.

! Shift lock release

S07BG0401

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position, then move the select lever to

the “P” position with the select lever button

pressed and the brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, check

and confirm the following and release the

shift lock accordingly.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button” �P365.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:

Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”

position, then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

If the select lever still does not move, refer

to “Shift lock release using the shift lock

release button” �P365.

If the shift lock cannot be released without

using the shift lock release button in the

above cases, there may be a malfunction

in the shift lock system or the vehicle

control system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion as soon as possible.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button

S07BG0402

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to

remove the shift lock cover. The shift

lock release button is located under the

shift lock cover.

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission

365

Starting and operating

(368,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. Remove the grip portion of the screw-

driver.

4. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert a screwdriver into the hole, move

it right and left while pushing the shift

lock release button using a screwdri-

ver, and then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as

soon as possible.

& Driving tips

S07BG05

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always apply the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the

vehicle with only the mechanical friction

of the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade using the “D”

position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly accel-

erates or rapidly pulls away from a

standstill. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

7-8. Power steering

S07AJ

& Power steering warning light

S07AJ10

& Power steering system fea-

tures

S07AJ11

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, the

power steering warning light on the com-

bination meter illuminates to inform the

driver that the warning system is function-

ing properly. Then, if the engine started,

the warning light turns off to inform the

driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

Power steering

366

(369,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely

low speeds, such as while frequently

turning the steering wheel during

parallel parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long

period of time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However, this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

this may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

7-9. Braking

S07AK

& Braking tips

S07AK01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads.

! When the brakes get wet

S07AK0101

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

S07AK0102

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To help

prevent this, shift to a lower gear to get

stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

S07AK0103

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

– CONTINUED –

Braking

367

Starting and operating

(370,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe place.

& Brake system

S07AK02

! Two separate circuits

S07AK0201

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake

systems. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. A much longer

distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.

! Electronic brake booster

S07AK0207

The vehicle is equipped with an electronic

brake booster to provide additional braking

force. Do not turn off the ignition switch

while driving because that will turn off the

brake booster, resulting in poor braking

power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, you will have

to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking

distance will increase.

NOTE

When the following operations are

performed, an operating sound from

the electronic brake boost control

module may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

. The brake pedal was operated.

. The driver’s door was opened.

. The EyeSight function was acti-

vated.

. Several minutes have passed after

the engine stopped.

! Supplemental booster function

when pressure fails

S07AK020701

If there is a malfunction in the braking

system, the power for the braking will be

stored by controlling the hydraulic pres-

sure of the VDC system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is oper-

ating, an operation sound and brake pedal

vibration may be generated.

! Brake assist system

S07AK0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following will

occur. However, even though these

occur, they do not indicate any mal-

functions, and the brake assist system

is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal is

applied by lighter force and gener-

ates a greater braking force.

. You might hear an ABS operating

noise from the engine compartment.

Braking

368

(371,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

S07AK03

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)

S07AL

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when the

ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the ABS

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over newly fallen snow, stopping

distances may be longer for a

vehicle with the ABS than one

without. Therefore, when driving

under these conditions, reduce

your speed and leave ample dis-

tance from other vehicles.

. When tire chains are installed,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. Be sure to reduce

your speed and maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintain constant

brake pedal pressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

– CONTINUED –

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

369

Starting and operating

(372,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& ABS self-check

S07AL01

Just after the vehicle is started, you may

feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar

to when the ABS operates, and you may

also hear the sound of the ABS working

from the engine compartment. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of

the ABS being carried out and does not

indicate a malfunction.

& ABS warning light

S07AL02

Refer to “ABS warning light” �P182.

7-11. Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) system

S07AM

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of the

braking force. It functions by adjusting the

distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

system malfunction, the EBD system also

stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& If EBD system malfunctions

S07AM01

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the following

warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If all of the warning lights remain on even

though the parking brake is released, the

brake fluid level may be low or there could

be a problem with the EBD system. Park

the vehicle in a safe place immediately and

contact a SUBARU dealer.

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

370

(373,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working prop-

erly. If the light remains illumi-

nated, have the brakes inspected

by a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system

S07AN

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics

Control system equipped vehicle

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

traveled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle equipped with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system, have

an inspection of that system

performed by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly.

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

– When replacing a flat tire, use

only the specified temporary

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

371

Starting and operating

(374,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

spare tire. However, even with

the specified temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system will be reduced.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is indicated by

flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control

operation indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating noise from the en-

gine compartment is heard

briefly when starting the engine

and when driving off after start-

ing the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

. In the following circumstances, the

vehicle may be less stable than it

feels to the driver. The Vehicle

Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation

does not indicate a system malfunc-

tion.

– On gravel-covered or rutted

roads

– On unfinished roads

– When the vehicle is towing a

trailer

– When the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation

of the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for nor-

mal conditions.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if the vehicle is equipped with

Vehicle Dynamics Control.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire as failure to do so

may render the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system unable to operate

correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

S07AN01

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light” �P186 and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light”

�P187.

& To turn on/off the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system

S07AN07

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P218.

Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by

deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

372

(375,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

system temporarily may help to escape

from the following situations. Turn the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when

necessary.

. A standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. Extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system during engine operation,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light on the combination meter illumi-

nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control

system will be deactivated. When “Vehicle

Dynamics Control” has been touched

again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light turns off.

You should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem helps prevent unstable vehicle

motion such as skidding using con-

trol of the brakes and engine power.

Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system unless it is abso-

lutely necessary. If you must turn off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem, drive very carefully based on

the road surface condition.

NOTE

. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”

has been touched to deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem automatically reactivates itself

the next time the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion and the engine is restarted.

. When “Vehicle Dynamics Control”

has been touched to deactivate the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system,

the vehicle’s running performance is

comparable with that of a vehicle

that does not have a Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system except when absolutely

necessary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is deactivated, com-

ponents of the brake control system

may still activate. When the brake

control system is activated, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light flashes.

7-13. X-MODE

S07BI

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with X-MODE could easily lead to

a serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with hill descent control function

could easily lead to a serious

accident. Be especially careful,

and depress the brake pedal if

necessary when driving on ex-

tremely steep downhill, frozen,

muddy or sandy roads. Failure

to control the vehicle’s speed

may cause a loss of control and

result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-MODE, winter tires should

be used when driving on snow-

covered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE

373

Starting and operating

(376,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

X-MODE does not guarantee that

the vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activate X-MODE when you en-

counter a very slippery surface at

low speed. However, having

X-MODE is no guarantee that full

vehicle control will be maintained

at all times and under all condi-

tions. When activating X-MODE,

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have the system in-

spected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. Observe the following precau-

tions in order to ensure that

X-MODE is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

– Use only the special tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a normal temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness of

X-MODE is reduced and this

should be taken into account

when driving the vehicle in

such a condition.

. If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may

be temporarily disabled. In this

case, the hill descent control

indicator will disappear. When

the hill descent control indicator

disappears, the hill descent con-

trol function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system

of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, etc. for driving with bad

road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can

drive more comfortably even in slippery

road conditions including uphill and down-

hill.

X-MODE has the following functions.

. Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you

can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed

driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is

likely to increase, the brake control system

will be activated to adjust the vehicle

speed.

. Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing

ability and driving ability as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

& To activate/deactivate

X-MODE

S07BI01

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)

1 X-MODE indicator

X-MODE

374

(377,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)

1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator

2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

To activate or deactivate X-MODE, oper-

ate the center information display. Refer to

“Car settings” �P218.

X-MODE control (models with 1 mode)

Speed range

Low-speed range

(less than 25 mph (40

km/h))

Medium to high-

speed range (25 mph

(40 km/h) or higher)

X-MODE: Available

X-MODE: Not avail-

able*

X-MODE control (models with 2 modes)

Speed range

Low-speed range

(less than 25 mph (40

km/h))

Medium to high-

speed range (25 mph

(40 km/h) or higher)

DEEP SNOW/MUD:

Available

X-MODE: Not avail-

able*

SNOW/DIRT: Avail-

able

X-MODE: Not avail-

able*

*1: If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40

km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a

buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be

deactivated.

*2: If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40

km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated, a

buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will be

deactivated. X-MODE will automatically re-

activate when the vehicle speed drops below

22 mph (35 km/h).

NOTE

. Even if you try to activate X-MODE

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

. While the engine is running, if any of

the following conditions is met,

X-MODE will be deactivated. In this

case, it is not possible to activate

X-MODE.

– The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light

illuminates.

– The AT OIL TEMP warning light

flashes.

– The ABS warning light illumi-

nates.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

. If the engine could overheat because

of a temperature increase of the

engine coolant, it may not be possi-

ble to activate X-MODE. Even while

X-MODE is activated, X-MODE will

be deactivated when the engine

coolant temperature increases.

Models with 2 modes:

. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving

on a snow-covered road where the

points of contact between the tires

and road surface are visible, or for

driving on an unpaved road.

. DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for

driving on a road covered with deep

snow where the points of contact

between the tires and road surface

are not visible, or for driving on a

muddy road.

. If cruise control is used after auto-

matic deactivation of the X-MODE,

the system will not switch to the

X-MODE even if the vehicle speed

drops below approximately 22 mph

(35 km/h).

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE

375

Starting and operating

(378,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Hill descent control function

S07BI03

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when X-MODE is activated

and the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill des-

cent control function may not be

sufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when towing

a trailer).

NOTE

. Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary

the vehicle speed using the brake

pedal or accelerator pedal.

. During braking by the hill descent

control function, the stop light will

illuminate.

. The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient

of the road.

. The hill descent control function

may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heard

briefly from the engine compart-

ment while the hill descent con-

trol function is operating.

– The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder

than usual etc.) when the brake

pedal is depressed during hill

descent control function opera-

tion.

! Hill descent control indicator

S07BI0301

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in the standby

mode. It flashes while the function is

operating. It will disappear when the

function is in the disabled mode. When

this function is changed from operational

to non-operational, it will disappear when

the vehicle speed reaches more than

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

X-MODE

376

(379,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

7-14. Tire pressure monitor-

ing system (TPMS) (U.S.-

spec. models)

S07AO

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this

system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a sharp

object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise, an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe location.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire inflation

pressure label. The tire infla-

tion pressure label is located

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on the

tire inflation pressure label. Refer

to “Tires and wheels” �P501.

The tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem does not function when the

vehicle is stationary. After adjust-

ing the tire pressures, increase

the vehicle speed to at least 20

mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS

rechecking of the tire inflation

pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low

pressure threshold, the low tire

pressure warning light should

turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately 1 minute. This

indicates the TPMS is unable to

monitor all four road wheels.

Contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible for tire and

sensor replacement and/or sys-

– CONTINUED –

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

377

Starting and operating

(380,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

tem resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off. Do not inject any tire

liquid or aerosol tire sealant into

the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately 1 minute, promptly

contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts in the cargo area. This may

cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and

the tire pressure monitoring system

will not function properly.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

7-15. Parking your vehicle

S07AP

& Electronic parking brake

S07AP03

1 Parking brake switch

2 Indicator light

3 Release the electronic parking brake

4 Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, make

sure that you turn off the engine.

Otherwise, the parking brake may

be released and an accident may

occur.

. If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunc-

tioning. Immediately stop your

Parking your vehicle

378

(381,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

vehicle in a safe location, use tire

stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving and

contact your SUBARU dealer.

. If you operate the electronic park-

ing brake when the brake is over-

heated or the vehicle is on a steep

slope, the electronic parking

brake indicator light may flash.

In this case, the vehicle may start

to move and it may lead to an

accident. Always use the tire

stops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parking

brake system has a malfunction

and the parking brake cannot be

applied, contact your SUBARU

dealer immediately for an inspec-

tion. If you have to park your

vehicle in such conditions, per-

form the following procedure.

– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.

– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select le-

ver cannot be shifted into the

“P” position, you must release

shift lock. Refer to “Shift lock

function” �P365.

– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle from

moving.

. Never drive with the parking

brake applied. Doing so will

cause unnecessary wear on the

brake pads. Before driving off,

always make sure that the park-

ing brake has been released and

the brake system warning light

has turned off.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic

parking brake. You can apply/release the

parking brake by operating the parking

brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and

pull up the parking brake switch.

To release: Press the parking brake

switch firmly while the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

When the parking brake is applied while

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,

the electronic parking brake indicator light

and the indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate. Refer to “Brake system

warning light” �P183.

NOTE

. If you press the parking brake switch

under the following conditions, the

parking brake will not be released.

– The ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

– You are not depressing the brake

pedal.

. The electronic parking brake system

uses motors to apply the parking

brake. Therefore, operating sounds

from the motors will be heard when

applying or releasing the parking

brake. Make sure that the motor

sounds are heard when applying or

releasing the parking brake.

. If you operate the parking brake

switch under the following condi-

tions, a chirp will sound and the

electronic parking brake indicator

light will flash.

– When the electronic parking

brake system has a malfunction.

– When the electronic parking

brake operation is prohibited

temporarily.

. When you cannot release the park-

ing brake due to, for example, a

system malfunction, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have your

SUBARU dealer release the parking

– CONTINUED –

Parking your vehicle

379

Starting and operating

(382,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

brake.

. If you stop operating the electronic

parking brake switch midway or

operate extremely slowly, the sys-

tem may detect an error and turn on

the brake system warning light.

However, this does not indicate a

malfunction if the brake system

warning light turns off after operat-

ing the switch.

. When the electronic parking brake

has not been used for a long period

of time, the electronic parking brake

may operate automatically after the

ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. This oc-

curs due to checking the proper

operation of the electronic parking

brake and does not indicate a mal-

function.

. If you cannot release the electronic

parking brake due to the switch

malfunction, refer to the instructions

described in “Automatic release

function by accelerator pedal”

�P380.

. After activating the electronic park-

ing brake, you may hear a short

sound several minutes after the

electronic parking brake indicator

light illuminates as the system con-

firms proper engagement. This

sound is different from the apply

and release sound.

This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.

– If the car is parked on a steep

incline.

– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” position.

This is a normal operating sound

under any of these conditions.

! Automatic release function by ac-

celerator pedal

S07AP0301

The parking brake will be automatically

released by depressing the accelerator

pedal. However, the automatic release

function does not operate under the

following conditions.

. Any door is open.

. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

. The select lever is in the “P” or “N”

position.

If the parking brake is automatically

released, the electronic parking brake

indicator light and the indicator light on

the parking brake switch turn off.

! Auto Vehicle Hold function

S07AP0305

The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-

matically keep the vehicle held even after

releasing the brake pedal when the vehicle

is at a complete stop, such as at traffic

signals.

WARNING

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function on a steep hill or slip-

pery road. The vehicle may move

even when using the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, causing serious

injury or accidents.

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold

function to park the vehicle. The

vehicle may move unexpectedly,

causing serious injury or acci-

dents. Make sure to shift the

select lever to the “P” position

and apply the electronic parking

brake in the following cases.

– When you are going to park

your vehicle

– When passengers are getting

in or out of the vehicle

– When you are loading or un-

. When using the Auto Vehicle

Hold function, do not release the

brake pedal before the Auto Ve-

hicle Hold indicator light illumi-

nates. The vehicle may move

unexpectedly, causing serious

Parking your vehicle

380

(383,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

injury or accidents.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function in the following cases.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move

unexpectedly, causing serious

injury or accidents.

– When washing your vehicle in

an automatic car wash

– When being towed

CAUTION

. When stopping on a steep slope

with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion turned on, the electronic

parking brake may be automati-

cally applied. Then the electronic

parking brake indicator light will

flash. In such a case, depress and

hold the brake pedal while stop-

ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may

move.

. When being towed, turn off the

Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto

Vehicle Hold function when stopping

on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold

function is turned off, the vehicle may

roll backward when driving off.

! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle

Hold function

S07AP030501

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P218.

NOTE

. When the electronic parking brake

system has a malfunction while the

Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned

on, a chirp will sound, the Auto

Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn

off and the brake system warning

light will turn on.

. Every time when starting the engine,

the Auto Vehicle Hold function will

be set to off.

! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold

function

S07AP030503

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake

pedal when all of the following conditions

are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold

function will operate.

. The driver’s door is closed.

. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.

. The select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

While the vehicle is kept held by the Auto

Vehicle Hold function, the Auto Vehicle

Hold indicator light will flash.

– CONTINUED –

Parking your vehicle

381

Starting and operating

(384,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold

function

S07AP030504

Perform any of the following operations to

release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

. Depress the accelerator pedal.

. Depress the brake pedal again.

. Apply the electronic parking brake.

. Shift the select lever to the “P” position

with the brake pedal pressed.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold func-

tion operating with the center informa-

tion display while depressing the brake

pedal.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is

released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator

light will change from flashing to illumi-

nated.

Under any of the following conditions, the

Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-

matically released and the electronic

parking brake will be automatically ap-

plied.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has

been in operation for 10 minutes.

. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.

. The ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position.

. The vehicle is stopped on a steep

slope.

. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is

malfunctioning.

In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold

indicator light will turn off and the electronic

parking brake indicator light will illuminate.

! Tips

S07AP030505

. When the electronic parking brake is

automatically applied with the vehicle

kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, release the electronic parking

brake by either of the following opera-

tions before starting off. Then make

sure that the electronic parking brake

indicator light is off.

– Depress the accelerator pedal with

the driver’s seatbelt fastened and

with the doors closed.

– Press the electronic parking brake

switch with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

. Under certain conditions, including a

malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a

warning buzzer will sound and a warn-

ing message will appear on the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD). All

warning messages should be strictly

observed.

. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be

kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold

function. In such a case, depress and

hold the brake pedal.

. When holding on a steep slope with the

Auto Vehicle Hold function activated,

the electronic parking brake may auto-

matically applied after stopping, then

the electronic parking brake indicator

light may flash. In such a case, depress

and hold the brake pedal while stopped.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move.

When getting out of the vehicle, stop

the vehicle on a flat surface, then apply

the electronic parking brake.

. If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

does not illuminates even after touch-

ing “Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)” with the

operating conditions met, the function

may have a malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

. You may hear a sound while the Auto

Vehicle Hold function is keeping your

vehicle stopped. This is normal, and

does not represent a malfunction.

. While the vehicle is kept held by the

Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake

pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not

a malfunction.

. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold

function, depress the brake pedal

firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold

may not operate.

Parking your vehicle

382

(385,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Emergency brake

S07AP0303

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in

case of an emergency. If the emer-

gency brake is excessively used, the

brake parts will wear down faster or

the brake may not work sufficiently

due to brake overheating.

NOTE

While using the emergency brake:

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light and the indicator light on the

parking brake switch illuminate and

a chirp sounds.

. A sound may be heard from the

engine compartment. This is the

operating sound of the brake that is

activated by the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can

stop the vehicle by pulling the parking

brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the

electronic parking brake indicator light and

the indicator light on the parking brake

switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

! Electronic parking brake system

warning

S07AP0304

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light

turns on, the electronic parking

brake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in

the nearest safe location and con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system, the brake system

warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic

parking brake indicator light” �P183.

& Parking tips

S07AP02

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake firmly.

. Put the select lever in the “P” position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of the

transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

– CONTINUED –

Parking your vehicle

383

Starting and operating

(386,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passen-

ger compartment, occupants in

the vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle has a bumper

under guard (optional), pay atten-

tion to blocks and other obstruc-

tions on the ground when park-

ing. The underspoiler could be

damaged by contact with them.

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

7-16. Hill start assist system

S07AU

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the brake pedal is released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the Hill start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will be deactivated and

may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier.

Hill start assist system

384

(387,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Starting forward facing uphill

2 Starting backward facing downhill

A Brake pedal

When the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed, the Hill start assist

system operates.

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the accelerator

pedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

. When starting backward facing uphill

. When starting forward facing downhill

. While the parking brake is applied

. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position

– CONTINUED –

Hill start assist system

385

Starting and operating

(388,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. While the Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light is illuminated. Refer to

“Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light” �P186.

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start

assist system may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is

needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

S07BM

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner

radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to

detect objects or vehicles to the rear,

drawing attention to the driver when

changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings when changing lanes

or reversing the vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver to change lanes or reverse

safely by monitoring the rear and

side areas of the vehicle. However,

you cannot rely on this system alone

in assuring the safety during a lane

change or reversing. Overconfi-

dence in this system could result in

an accident and lead to serious

injury or death. Since the system

operation has various limitations,

the flashing or illumination of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may be delayed or the warning

buzzer may be delayed or inopera-

tive, even if there is a vehicle travel-

ing in a neighboring lane or ap-

proaching your vehicle from either

side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System features

S07BM01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching

at high speeds (Blind Spot Detection)

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the

vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

above functions.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries and Canada. When driving in

other countries, certification of the

country where the vehicle is driven

must be obtained. For certification in

the U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries and Canada, refer to “Certifi-

BSD/RCTA

386

(389,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

cation for the BSD/RCTA” �P393.

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

S07BM0101

1 Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as

follows.

. If the system detects a vehicle in the

blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light(s) on the outside mirror

(s) will illuminate.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction which the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-

nating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light will flash.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

S07BM010101

1 Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as

follows.

. If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching at a high speed in the

neighboring lanes, the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light(s) on the outside

mirror(s) will illuminate.

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction which the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light is illumi-

nating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light will flash.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

387

Starting and operating

(390,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

S07BM0103

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the rear view

camera screen (audio/navigation moni-

tor).

! Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA

S07BM010301

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,

the RCTA may not operate properly in

angled parking.

Example 1

1 The detection range of the radar sensors

2 Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors

A Vehicle that may not be detected

B Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not

be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehi-

cle (B). Always be sure to check the

surroundings when reversing the

vehicle.

Example 2

1 The detection range of the radar sensors

C Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle

Always be sure to check the surround-

ings when reversing the vehicle.

BSD/RCTA

388

(391,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& System operation

S07BM02

! Operating conditions

S07BM0201

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned

off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7

mph (12 km/h) (except when rever-

sing).

. The select lever is in the “R” position

(RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator remains off (except when

reversing).

NOTE

. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA

will stop operating and the BSD/

RCTA warning indicator will appear.

If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator

appears, have your vehicle in-

spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operat-

ing (or may stop operating) and the

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will ap-

pear.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the

orientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for any reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper

surface around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an en-

vironment in which there are no

objects around (such as in a

desert) for a long time

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors increased exces-

sively due to long driving on

uphill grades in summer, etc.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors becomes extre-

mely low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

– When the vehicle battery be-

comes overvoltage

When the above conditions are

corrected, the BSD/RCTA will re-

sume operation and the BSD/RCTA

OFF indicator will disappear. How-

ever, if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

has appeared for a prolonged time,

have the system inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA

detection may be impaired and the

system may not operate properly

under the following conditions.

– When the rear bumper around the

radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface

around the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads or

through puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the

following.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

389

Starting and operating

(392,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

destrians, stationary objects on

the road or road side, etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehi-

cles with a low body height such

as sports cars or a trailer with no

cargo)

– Vehicles that are not approaching

your vehicle even though they

are in the detection area (either

on a neighboring lane to the rear

or beside your vehicle when

reversing) (The system deter-

mines the presence of approach-

ing vehicles based on data de-

tected by the radar sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving parallel to your

vehicle at almost the same speed

for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles traveling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed that you are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehi-

cles driving in a lane next to the

neighboring lane.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light/warning buzzer

S07BM03

When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will operate

to alert the driver when there are vehicles

in the neighboring lanes. When reversing

the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light and warning buzzer will

operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is

approaching from the left or right side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

S07BM0301

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside

mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-

tected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following

conditions.

. While the indicator light illuminates, if

you operate the turn signal lever toward

the side in which this light turned on.

. When reversing the vehicle while the

system detects a vehicle approaching

from either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

S07BM030101

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. You may have difficulty recognizing

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light under the following conditions.

– When affected by direct sunlight

– When affected by the headlight

beams from the vehicles behind

. While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, even if the headlights are

turned on, the brightness of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

will not be reduced. For details about

the illumination brightness control

dial, refer to “Illumination bright-

ness control” �P173.

BSD/RCTA

390

(393,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

S07BM0302

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the center

information display. For details, refer to

“Car settings” �P218.

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

S07BM0303

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

and the warning buzzer may be de-

layed or the system may fail to issue

these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-

boring lane from a lane next to the

neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and down-

hill grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehicle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring

lane are driving on the far side of

each lane

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersec-

tion)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neigh-

boring lane

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by touching “Rear Vehicle

Detection (BSD/RCTA)”

– Immediately after the select lever is

shifted to the “R” position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the cargo area

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close

to solid objects on the road or road side

(such as guardrails, tunnels or side-

walls).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash when turning at an

intersection in urban areas or a multi-

lane intersection.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash and the warning buzzer

may sound if a building or a wall exists

in the reversing direction.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When you are driving on the near

side of its lane from the correspond-

ing vehicle

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

391

Starting and operating

(394,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

away is driving on the near side of its

lane from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

S07BM08

! System temporary stops

S07BM0801

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message

2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system is

used under the following conditions.

. Extremely high or low temperatures

. When abnormal voltage exists for the

vehicle battery

. When the radar sensor is significantly

misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected,

the system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear. If the indicator remains displayed

for a prolonged time, have the system

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stops due to

reduced radar sensitivity

S07BM0802

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due

to reduced radar sensitivity

2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectabil-

ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once

the condition is corrected, the system will

recover from the temporary stop condition

and the indicator will disappear. If the

indicator remains displayed for a pro-

longed time, have the system inspected

at a SUBARU dealer.

& BSD/RCTA warning indicator

S07BM04

! System malfunction

S07BM0403

1 BSD/RCTA malfunction message

2 At first, this message will appear

3 Then this message will appear

4 BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

BSD/RCTA

392

(395,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& To turn on/off the BSD/RCTA

S07BM09

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and off,

operate the center information display.

Refer to “Car settings” �P218.

When the BSD/RCTA system is turned

OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on the

combination meter display (color LCD) will

illuminate.

NOTE

. In the following cases, turn off the

BSD/RCTA system. The system may

not operate properly due to blocked

radar waves.

– When towing a load

– When a bicycle carrier or other

item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last

known status of the system is main-

tained. For example, if the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position with the BSD/RCTA

deactivated, the BSD/RCTA remains

deactivated the next time the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

S07BM06

! The U.S. and other FCC compliant

countries

S07BM0601

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA

393

Starting and operating

(396,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Canada-spec. models

S07BM0602

& Handling of radar sensors

S07BM07

1 Sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the

vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

To ensure correct operation of the BSD/

RCTA, observe the following precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface near

the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the radar

sensors.

. Do not modify the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the radar

sensors.

. Do not expose the bumper near the

radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

BSD/RCTA

394

(397,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including the

inability to detect vehicles entering the

detection areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to

contact your SUBARU dealer for in-

spection.

. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

7-18. Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) system (if

equipped)

S07BN

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a

system designed to help avoid collisions or

reduce collision damage when reversing

the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is

detected in the reversing direction, the

system will notify the driver with a warning

sound and may activate the vehicle’s

brakes automatically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) is not a system intended

to replace the driver’s responsi-

bility to check their surroundings

for vehicles or obstacles to avoid

a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv-

ing safely. Before reversing, be

sure to first depress the brake

pedal and visually check the

surroundings.

. There are some cases in which

the vehicle cannot avoid colli-

sion, because the system opera-

tion has limitations. The warning

sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present.

. Make sure to set the Automatic

Braking function to OFF when the

vehicle is on the free roller or on

the chassis dynamometer. Other-

wise, the vehicle may move and it

may cause an accident.

. Make sure to set the Automatic

Braking function to OFF when

towing a trailer. Otherwise, the

vehicle may move and it may

cause an accident.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may become

unstable.

. When an attachment part (trailer

hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) is installed on the rear of

the vehicle, turn off the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB). If this

function is on when an attach-

ment or a similar part is installed,

it may result in a system malfunc-

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

395

Starting and operating

(398,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

tion that causes an accident

resulting in serious damage, in-

jury or death.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system records and stores the follow-

ing data when automatic braking oper-

ates. It does not record conversations,

personal information or other audio

data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU may acquire and use the

recorded data for the purpose of vehi-

cle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third

party except under the following con-

ditions.

. The vehicle owner has given his/her

consent.

. The disclosure/provision is based

on a court order or other legally

enforceable request.

. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be

identified is provided to a research

institution for statistical processing

or similar purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system overview

S07BN01

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate the following 2 func-

tions using 4 sonar sensors.

. Sonar Audible Alarm function

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system detects objects rearward and

warns the driver by warning message on

the center information display and warning

beeps.

. Automatic Braking function

The Automatic Braking function detects

objects rearward and if there is a high risk

of a collision, the system decelerates the

vehicle and controls the braking to reduce

damage.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

396

(399,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 When reversing

2 When either strong automatic braking or

torque control is applied to prevent

collision (in this case, short warning

beeps or continuous warning beeps will

sound)

3 When the vehicle is stopped by the

system (in this case, the continuous

beep will remain sounding)

4 Object (e.g., a wall)

! Detecting range

S07BN0101

1 Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2 Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3 Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reversing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing gate as an

obstacle and brake may activate. In

this case, remain calm and either

continue to depress the accelerator

pedal or cancel the system. To

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

397

Starting and operating

(400,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-

ing the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system operation” �P405.

& Operating conditions

S07BN02

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system will operate when all of the follow-

ing conditions are met.

1 EyeSight warning indicator

2 RAB warning indicator

3 RAB OFF indicator

4 Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.

. The RAB warning indicator is off.

. The RAB OFF indicator is off.

. The select lever is in the “R” position.

. Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator is

off.

Sonar Audible Alarm function

. The Sonar Audible Alarm is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph (0

to 15 km/h).

Automatic Braking function

. The Automatic Braking is set to “ON”.

. The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph

(1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system

will not operate. Promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

is illuminated.

– The RAB warning indicator is

illuminated.

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic Braking (RAB) system

cannot be operated.

– The

(EyeSight Temporary Stop

indicator: White) is illuminated,

and the messages correspond-

ing to the EyeSight temporary

stop are displayed on the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD).

For details, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

– The RAB OFF indicator is illumi-

nated.

. In the following cases, the functions

may not be able to properly work.

Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the sonar sensors or

the rear bumper near the sonar

sensor.

– The rear bumper is modified.

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and attached.

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading con-

dition or modification.

– There is damage to the sonar

sensors or the rear bumper near

the sonar sensor.

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper

is deformed.

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed

is less than approximately 3 mph (5

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

398

(401,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

km/h). However, the system does not

guarantee that the vehicle will be

able to avoid collisions in any situa-

tion.

. If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver’s

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not

operate.

. The system may not be able to detect

and apply the brake with the follow-

ing objects.

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which

may not reflect the sound wave

emitted from the sonar sensor.

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select

lever is set to the “R” position.

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave

emitted from the sonar sensor

such as a chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed

to detect and apply brake.

– Pedestrians.

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles.

– Objects which absorbs sound

waves such as cloth or snow.

– Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle.

– Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks.

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above.

– Objects that are out of range of

the center of the vehicle in the

horizontal direction.

– Objects that are not perpendicu-

lar to the ground.

– The surface of the object is

uneven or wavy.

. When reversing the vehicle, the

functions may not be able to work

properly or may cause a system

malfunction if the following condi-

tions exist.

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby:

– Horn sound from another vehicle.

– Engine sound from other vehi-

cles.

– Sound of an air brake.

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle.

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted near by.

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area

near the sonar sensor becomes

too hot or too cold to operate.

– The sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors

are exposed to heavy rain or a

significant amount of water.

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor:

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna)

are attached.

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensor.

– The vehicle is significantly in-

clined.

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehi-

cle’s loading condition, etc.

– When the sonar sensor is mis-

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

399

Starting and operating

(402,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

aligned due to a collision or an

accident.

Surrounding environment:

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad crossing bars

are present in the reversing di-

rection.

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area.

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to

the vehicle such as narrow tun-

nels, narrow bridges, narrow

roads or narrow garages.

– Wheel track or hole is present in

the ground of the reversing direc-

tion.

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grating cover).

– The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill.

– When reversing downhill.

– A curb or step is present in the

reversing direction.

– Reversing in a garage with a low

ceiling or a tunnel.

– There is a patch of snow rear-

ward.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

400

(403,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

– There is a puddle of water.

– There is an obstacle that is next

to an object.

– Going back along a wall.

– The area where the road starts

touching dirt and snow.

– When reversing on an uneven

road.

. In circumstances such as the follow-

ing, it may not be possible to avoid a

collision even when the system

operates normally.

– Roads are slippery.

– The tire air pressure is not cor-

rect.

– The tires have become worn.

– Tire chains are installed.

– Tires which are not the desig-

nated size are installed.

– Emergency repairs were per-

formed using a puncture repair

kit.

– The suspension was modified.

– Vehicle driving is unstable due to

accident or malfunction.

– The brake warning light is illumi-

nated.

& Sonar Audible Alarm function

S07BN03

When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system is in operation, an audible warning

beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the

driver of a potential collision.

NOTE

It may take time to display the wall and

sound warning beeps after the object

was recognized by the Sonar Audible

Alarm.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

401

Starting and operating

(404,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity alert

(object detected)

43 to 59 in (110 to 150 cm) Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

alert (approaching the

object)

28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert

(approaching closer

to the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the

object)

20 in (50 cm) or less Red

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

! Obstacle detected and alert level

S07BN0301

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be shown on the center information

display and combination meter display

(color LCD).

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automatic

braking will be applied.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

1 Long proximity alert (green)

2 Medium proximity alert (yellow)

3 Short proximity alert (orange)

4 Closest proximity alert (red)

The alert levels are indicated on the center

information display as shown in the follow-

ing.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

402

(405,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Long proximity alert (object detected)

1 Green: 43 to 59 in (110 to 150 cm)

Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)

1 Yellow: 28 to 43 in (70 to 110 cm)

Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer)

1 Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

1 Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

& Automatic Braking function

operation

S07BN08

! Object close behind warning

S07BN0801

Automatic braking warning

1 Warning message

If the system determine the risk of collision

with the object. Short warning beeps or

continuous warning beeps will sound and

either strong automatic braking or torque

control will be applied to prevent collision.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

403

Starting and operating

(406,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Depress brake pedal warning

1 Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the center information display and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

NOTE

The Sonar Audible Alarm function and

Automatic Braking function are differ-

ent in operation conditions. Therefore

there are cases in which only one of

these functions will activate.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately after the system stops the

vehicle by automatic braking. De-

pending on the conditions of the

road surface and tires, the vehicle

may not remain stopped, possibly

leading to an accident.

! After the vehicle is stopped by the

system

S07BN0802

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the

system will temporarily stop operating.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

the select lever is shifted to a position other

than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position.

NOTE

. In the following cases, after the

vehicle has been stopped by the

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, brake control is released

and the electronic parking brake

operates. For details about releasing

the parking brake, refer to “Electro-

nic parking brake” �P378.

– When 2 minutes pass after the

vehicle is stopped

– When any door is opened

. The Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system may stop operating

temporarily in the following cases

and the RAB OFF indicator will

illuminate.

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the sonar sensors or the rear

bumper near the sonar sensor.

– Objects are too close to the rear

bumper when the select lever is

set to the “R” position.

– The system detects sounds of a

similar frequency to the RAB

sonar.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF mode is selected.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

404

(407,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking (RAB) system

operation

S07BN04

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system can be temporarily canceled by

any of the following operation.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the

brake pedal is depressed.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the

accelerator pedal is depressed.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed

continuously (In this case, limited ac-

celeration will be canceled and the

vehicle will continue reversing.)

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the

object is no longer detected.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system ON/OFF setting

S07BN05

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

can be set by operating the center in-

formation display.

1 ON setting key of Automatic Braking

function

2 OFF setting key of Automatic Braking

function

3 ON setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

4 OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible

Alarm function

When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.

Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn

the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn

the setting ON.

When the Automatic Braking function or

the Sonar Audible Alarm function is turned

OFF, the following indicator(s) will illumi-

nate.

1 Sonar Audible Alarm OFF indicator

2 RAB OFF indicator

The RAB OFF indicator or the Sonar

Audible Alarm OFF indicator will turn off

when the corresponding function is turned

ON.

NOTE

. When the settings cannot be chan-

ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

405

Starting and operating

(408,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

grayed out.

. The ON/OFF setting key may be

grayed out if the Reverse Automatic

Braking (RAB) system malfunctions,

etc. In this case, turn the ignition

switch to the “OFF” position and

then turn it to the “ON” position

again. If the setting cannot be chan-

ged even after turning the ignition

switch to the “ON” position again,

we recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

. As soon as you turn off the ignition

switch, the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing (RAB) ON/OFF setting is stored

in the system. Therefore, when you

turn the ignition switch from the

“OFF” state to the “ON” position,

the Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) setting will revert to the state

that was set before the ignition

switch was turned off.

. When you turn the ignition switch

off, the Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF

settings will always reset, and the

system will not store the settings of

the function. Therefore, every time

you turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, the Sonar Audible

Alarm will turn on automatically.

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the center information

display.

. Warning Volume

. Sonar Audible Alarm

For details, refer to “Car settings” �P218.

& RAB warning indicator

S07BN07

1 RAB malfunction message

2 RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system malfunctions, the above indicator

illuminates on the combination meter.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details.

& Handling of the sonar sen-

sors

S07BN06

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear

bumper. To ensure the proper operation of

the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the sonar sensor or the bumper

surface near the sonar sensors.

. Always keep the rear bumper surface

near the sonar sensors clean.

. Do not modify the rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

. Do not apply high pressure water to the

sonar sensors with a high pressure

carwashing machine.

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system

406

(409,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including in-

ability to detect objects in the reversing

direction. If any strong impact is applied

to the rear bumper, contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, paintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

7-19. Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem (if equipped)

S07BP

Driver Monitoring System is introduced as

DriverFocus in some countries.

The Driver Monitoring System monitors

possible cases when the driver is not

paying attention to the forward direction,

and also recognizes individual users.

This system warns the driver of inattentive/

drowsy driving, and can support safe and

comfortable driving by automatically re-

trieving the following settings.

– Driver’s position

– Climate control setting

– Meter setting

– Center information display setting

When a user is registered, various settings

are automatically retrieved when the user

enters the vehicle.

1 Camera

CAUTION

. Always use the utmost care in

driving

– Overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the

Driver Monitoring System

could easily lead to a serious

accident.

. This system cannot detect if the

driver is feeling drowsy or is

concentrating on safe driving.

. It cannot judge if the driver is

awake or asleep, if their driving

abilities have diminished, or if

they are concentrating on safe

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

407

Starting and operating

(410,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

driving.

. In some circumstances, the sys-

tem may not be able to correctly

detect the driver state.

NOTE

. The user recognition camera does

not save images, audio, or video.

. The Driver Monitoring System may

not operate correctly when sunlight

is shining into the vehicle in the

following ways.

– Sunlight is shining directly (or

through glass) onto the user

recognition camera.

– There are shadows on the dri-

ver’s face caused by sunlight (or

any light with a strong infrared

component).

– There are large momentary fluc-

tuations in the strength of the

sunlight (or any light with a

strong infrared component) shin-

ing on the face.

. Correct detection may not be possi-

ble when a device that includes an

infrared light source (such as a

commercially available Driver Mon-

itoring System) is installed in the

vehicle interior.

. The Driver Monitoring System may

not operate correctly at the following

times when the driver is wearing

glasses or sunglasses.

– The sunglasses do not allow the

easy passage of infrared light.

– The surrounding scenery is re-

flected strongly in the lenses of

the glasses or sunglasses.

– The eyes are hidden by the frame

of the glasses and the user

recognition camera cannot de-

tect the eyes.

– The light from an infrared light

source (LED) is reflected in the

lenses of the glasses or sun-

glasses.

– The driver is wearing an eye-

patch.

– The driver is wearing a hat set

deeply over the eyes.

. Depending on the type of mask,

correct detection of inattentive/

drowsy driving may not be possible.

. Correct user recognition is not pos-

sible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is

covered with a mask, muffler, sun-

glasses, or other item.

. The Driver Monitoring System may

not operate correctly when the eye-

brows, eyes, nose, or mouth is

hidden due to item that is between

the face and the system.

. If a thick cover is attached to the

steering wheel, then depending on

the position set for the tilt/telescopic

steering wheel, the cover may block

the system’s view of the face, and

the system and the Driver Monitor-

ing System may not operate cor-

rectly.

. Do not attach any stickers to the

user recognition camera or the infra-

red light source (LED). If the user

recognition camera or infrared light

source (LED) is covered by an

obstruction, it will not be possible

to correctly monitor the driver.

. If an accessory is hung from the

inside mirror, correct detection may

not be possible.

. Do not touch the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) directly with your fingers. If

there is dirt or a fingerprint on these

parts, it will not be possible to

correctly monitor the driver. If there

is dirt or a fingerprint on these parts,

either wipe them with a soft dry

cloth, or wipe gently with a damp

cloth after first firmly wringing the

water out.

. If the surface of the user recognition

camera or the infrared light source

(LED) becomes scratched, correct

Driver Monitoring System

408

(411,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

detection may not be possible. Be

careful that hard objects do not

contact these parts.

. If there is condensation on the user

recognition camera or the infrared

light source (LED), correct detection

may not be possible. If there is

condensation on these parts, wipe

it away with a soft dry cloth.

. When registering a user for user

recognition, avoid closing your eyes

as much as possible.

. If the user recognition success rate

is low, it is possible that the user is

not correctly registered. Delete the

registered data and perform regis-

tration again.

. If a user frequently drives both with

glasses and contact lenses, it is

recommended that registration be

performed both when wearing

glasses and when wearing contact

lenses.

. User recognition starts immediately

after entering the vehicle, however if

the user looks downward or at the

driver side mirror for a long time, the

user may not be recognized.

. When one person among twins or

another pair of persons with similar

facial features is registered, the

other person may be incorrectly

recognized as the registered user

when entering the vehicle.

. If the person in the passenger’s seat

leans into the driver’s seat, or in

other cases when there are two or

more faces near the driver’s seat, the

system may not operate correctly.

. There are cases when the system

concludes that the user’s eyes are

closed when the user is looking

downward during driving, such as

when checking instruments or the

navigation screen. In such cases,

the drowsy driving warning buzzer

may sound or the system may

otherwise not operate correctly.

. If the eyes are narrowed when laugh-

ing or when there is a dazzling

outside light, the system may judge

that the eyes are closed and the

drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound or the system may otherwise

not operate correctly.

. The drowsy driving or asleep warn-

ing states are recognized from the

length of time and percentage of

time that the eyes are closed. The

drowsy driving warning buzzer will

not sound simply when the driver

feels sleepy or yawns.

. Even when the driver does not feel

sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed

or if he or she blinks frequently, the

drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound.

. The inattentive driving warning buz-

zer may sound if the driver leans

forward or puts his or her head out of

the window while driving.

. The inattentive driving warning buz-

zer will not sound when the vehicle

is stopped or traveling at slow speed

even if the driver is not looking

ahead.

. The Driver Monitoring System col-

lects and stores data regarding

drivers’ facial features. Facial recog-

nition data is stored locally and does

not leave the vehicle. It is not

transmitted to or stored by SUBARU

or anyone else. The Driver Monitor-

ing System may be disabled and any

stored driver data may be deleted by

following the instructions below. If

the Driver Monitoring System is

disabled, it will be unable to provide

any of its safety or convenience

functions.

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

409

Starting and operating

(412,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System

setting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functions

Driver Monitoring System*

ON OFF

User recognition

function*

Inattentive/drowsy

driving warning

Available Not available

User recognition

function

Available Not available

OFF

Inattentive/drowsy

driving warning

Available Not available

User recognition

function

Not available

Driver Monitoring System

410

(413,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Available function items

Driver Monitoring System*

ON OFF

User recognition

function*

Delete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not available

Update Seat and

Mirror Position

Available Not available

Delete Driver Posi-

tion

Available Not available

OFF

Delete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not available

Update Seat and

Mirror Position

Not available Not available

Delete Driver Posi-

tion

Not available

*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer to “

Car settings”

�P218.

*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization settings.

Refer to “

Car settings” �P218.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is

registered.

Available functions

The user is registered. The user is not registered.

User recognition function Available

Not available

& User recognition function

S07BP01

WARNING

Perform registration, retrieving, or

delete of the seat position and out-

side mirror angle before beginning

driving. There is the risk of an

accident if registration, retrieving,

or delete is performed while driving.

When a user is registered, it is possible to

retrieve the following settings.

! Driver position personalization

S07BP0101

. Seat position and outside mirror angle

Retrieves the registered seat position and

outside mirror angle.

. Reverse tilt angle

Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle.

! Meter personalization

S07BP0102

. Combination meter display (color LCD)

basic screen

Displays the screen which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

! Center information display perso-

nalization

S07BP0103

. Center information display basic

screen

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

411

Starting and operating

(414,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Displays the screen which the user had

selected at the time when he/she last

exited the vehicle.

. Fuel consumption screen

Displays the average fuel economy for

past driving by that user.

! Climate control personalization

S07BP0104

. Climate control settings

Retrieves the preferred setting tempera-

ture, airflow mode selection and other

settings which the user had selected at

the time when he/she last exited the

vehicle.

NOTE

When a recognized user exits the

vehicle while the Max A/C mode is on

and the push engine switch is turned

off, the system stores the setting con-

figured before Max A/C mode was

turned on.

! Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF

status

S07BP0105

Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System

ON/OFF status which the user had se-

lected at the time when he/she last exited

the vehicle.

! Changing the personalization settings

S07BP0106

Item

Driver’s position personaliza-

tion

Seat position/outside mirror

angle

Change the setting by using the

center information display cus-

tomization function. Refer to

“

Car settings” �P218.

Reverse tilt-down outside mir-

ror angle

Meter personalization*

Combination meter display

(color LCD) basic screen

When the customization screen

linked with the synchronized

user function is selected and

the setting is changed, it is

automatically stored.

Center information display

personalization*

Center information display ba-

sic screen

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the

conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the

screen was selected and the setting was changed.

Driver Monitoring System

412

(415,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Inattentive/drowsy driving

warning

S07BP02

While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem monitors possible cases of driver

inattention or drowsiness and warns the

driver.

When the inattentive/drowsy driving warn-

ing activates, the buzzer sounds and an

interrupt display appears.

NOTE

. The inattentive/drowsy driving warn-

ing operates regardless of the status

of the user recognition function.

. The inattentive driving warning does

not activate when the turn signal is

operating or when the select lever is

in the “R” position.

. When the pre-collision brake system

OFF indicator is illuminated on the

combination meter display (color

LCD), the inattentive driving warning

activates at the same timing as usual

even when a vehicle ahead or ob-

stacle is detected. For details about

the EyeSight system, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the

EyeSight system.

! Inattentive driving warning

S07BP0201

When the system monitors that the driver

may be inattentive, it warns the driver.

When the inattentive driving warning acti-

vates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt

display appears on the combination meter

display (color LCD).

When the EyeSight system has detected a

vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward

direction, the inattentive driving warning

may activate at earlier timing than usual.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

413

Starting and operating

(416,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Drowsy driving warning

S07BP0202

Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warning

is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and

an interrupt display appears.

Combination meter

display (color LCD)

Center information

display

Warning chime

Drowsy driving

Beep, beep... (Con-

tinues until the driver’s

eyes open.)

Very drowsy

Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep (5 times)

Slightly drowsy

— Beep

Not drowsy — —

—

& Driver Monitoring System in-

dicator/warning

S07BP03

1 Driver Monitoring System operation in-

dicator light (green)

2 Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator

light

3 Driver Monitoring System temporary stop

indicator light

4 Driver Monitoring System warning light

(yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/

warning indicates the status of the Driver

Monitoring System on the combination

meter display (color LCD).

NOTE

When the Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem temporary stop indicator, or Driver

Monitoring System warning is illumi-

Driver Monitoring System

414

(417,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

nated, the Driver Monitoring System

function cannot be used. In addition,

the following items cannot be selected.

. Register User

. Delete User

. Delete All Users

. Update Seat and Mirror Position

. Delete Driver Position

. Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

! Driver Monitoring System operation

indicator light (green)

S07BP0301

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is operating.

! Driver Monitoring System OFF in-

dicator light

S07BP0302

This indicator illuminates when the user

has turned off the Driver Monitoring

System and the Driver Monitoring System

is not operating.

! Driver Monitoring System tempor-

ary stop indicator light

S07BP0303

This indicator illuminates when the Driver

Monitoring System is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops

temporarily in the following circum-

stances.

. When the temperature of the main

unit of the Driver Monitoring System

is high or low.

. When the Driver Monitoring System

cannot monitor the driver’s eye

movement.

. When the Driver Monitoring System

cannot monitor the driver’s eye-

brows, eyes, nose or mouth.

. When the camera and the infrared

light source (LED) are covered and

the Driver Monitoring System can-

not monitor the driver correctly.

! Driver Monitoring System warning

light (yellow)

S07BP0304

This warning illuminates when there is a

problem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have

the system inspected.

& Using the Driver Monitoring

System

S07BP04

! User recognition

S07BP0401

When a user is registered with the user

recognition function, the Driver Monitoring

System performs the following.

1. When the door is opened and the

push-button ignition switch is OFF,

the user recognition screen appears

and the Driver Monitoring system

starts user recognition.

The user recognition screen may not

appear when the door is opened in

some cases, such as when only a short

time has passed after the push-button

ignition switch was turned OFF. In such

cases, user recognition starts when the

door is closed however the user

recognition screen does not appear.

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

415

Starting and operating

(418,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face forward

for a few moments.

3. When user recognition is completed,

the Hello screen appears on the

combination meter display (color

LCD).

At this time, the seat position, outside

mirror angle, climate control settings,

combination meter display (color LCD)

basic screen and center information dis-

play basic screen will all change based on

the user information.

NOTE

. When a center information display

operation switch is pressed, the

user recognition screen is canceled,

however user recognition con-

tinues.

. When the select lever is not in the

“P” position, the seat position will

not change even when user recogni-

tion is completed.

. If user recognition fails, perform

recognition again following the in-

structions, refer to “When a user is

not recognized” �P416.

. User recognition is not performed

while driving.

. If the seat position or outside mirror

angle are in motion at the time when

user recognition is completed, then

it is not possible to retrieve the seat

position, outside mirror angle, or

reverse tilt-down outside mirror an-

gle.

. If any of the following operations is

performed while retrieving of the

seat position or outside mirror an-

gle, retrieving of the seat position

and outside mirror angle is can-

celed.

– The power seat adjustment

switch was operated.

– The outside mirror adjustment

switch was operated.

– The “SET” button was pressed.

– The “1” or “2” button was

pressed.

– The select lever was moved to a

position other than “P” position.

! When a user is not recognized

S07BP0402

In the following case, user recognition may

not be possible and “User recognition

stopped” may be displayed.

. There is an object blocking the camera.

Remove the obstacle and follow the

reference procedure to perform user re-

cognition again. Refer to “Driver Monitor-

ing System” �P225.

1 Camera

NOTE

. User recognition may not be possi-

ble when there is dirt or fingerprints

on the user recognition camera. To

clean, either wipe using a soft cloth

Driver Monitoring System

416

(419,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

or else wipe gently using a mois-

tened cloth that has been thoroughly

wrung out.

. When the synchronized user func-

tion is turned OFF, manual repeat

facial scan is not possible.

& Registering and deleting a

user

S07BP05

Users can be registered in the Driver

Monitoring System, and registered users

can be deleted. For the user registration

and delete procedures, refer to “Driver

Monitoring System” �P225.

NOTE

. When the Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring

System temporary stop indicator,

or Driver Monitoring System warn-

ing is illuminated, the following

items cannot be selected.

– Register User

– Delete User

– Delete All Users

. User information can also be deleted

by resetting the center information

display to the factory default set-

tings. When the settings are reset to

the factory default settings, all user

information is deleted. The settings

cannot be reset to the factory default

settings when the Driver Monitoring

System is OFF.

& Registering and deleting dri-

ver position personalization

S07BP06

At the time when a user is registered, the

seat position, outside mirror angle, and

reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle are

registered at the same time. To change the

setting for the seat position, outside mirror

angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror

angle, refer to “Driver Monitoring System”

�P225.

NOTE

. Start the user registration after ad-

justing the seat position, outside

mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle. If they are

adjusted during user registration, it

may be disrupted. Refer to “Power

seat” �P34 or “Outside mirrors”

�P273.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position before user registra-

tion is complete, the information of

the adjusted seat position, outside

mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down

outside mirror angle will not be

saved.

. When the user recognition setting is

OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring

System OFF indicator, Driver Mon-

itoring System temporary stop indi-

cator, or Driver Monitoring System

warning is illuminated, the following

items cannot be selected.

– Update Seat and Mirror Position

– Delete Driver Position

. The driver position can be registered

or deleted only when a registered

user is sitting in the driver’s seat and

user recognition is completed.

& Driver Monitoring System

ON/OFF settings

S07BP07

NOTE

. When the Driver Monitoring System

is turned OFF after user recognition

was completed, the user recognition

function stores the Driver Monitor-

ing System ON/OFF state.

. Even when the Driver Monitoring

System is set to OFF, the Driver

Monitoring System automatically

turns ON once the driver’s door is

opened and closed while the vehicle

is stopped. This only occurs when

the user recognition setting is ON.

The system then reverts automati-

cally to the OFF state.

. After the Driver Monitoring System

was turned OFF, if the Driver Mon-

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System

417

Starting and operating

(420,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

itoring System is turned ON while

the driver’s door is open, user

recognition may not occur correctly.

! To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring

System

S07BP0701

To turn the Driver Monitoring System on

and off, operate the center information

display. Refer to “Car settings” �P218.

When the Driver Monitoring System is

turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator on the combination meter

display (color LCD) will illuminate.

NOTE

Even when the Driver Monitoring Sys-

tem is turned off, the user recognition

and automatically retract seat on entry

functions do not switch on or off

automatically.

! User recognition settings

S07BP0702

The Driver Monitoring System User recog-

nition function can be turned ON/OFF. For

the setting procedure, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P218.

NOTE

. The user recognition function

setting cannot be changed for each

individual user.

. The default setting for the user

recognition function is ON.

. When the user recognition function

is turned OFF, the following items

cannot be selected.

– Repeat Facial Scan

– Register User

– Update Seat and Mirror Position

– Delete Driver Position

! Automatically retract seat on entry

S07BP0704

The automatically retract seat on entry

which automatically slides back the dri-

ver’s seat when the driver’s door is

unlocked and opened.

This function can be turned ON/OFF. For

the setting procedure, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P218.

CAUTION

Sit in the seat after the power seat

movement backward has been com-

pleted. Not doing so could result in

injury.

NOTE

. If the seat position is not registered

in the access key fob memory, the

automatically retract seat on entry

function can be used.

. Even when the automatically retract

seat on entry setting is ON, the

automatically retract seat on entry

function automatically turns OFF

when the user recognition function

is OFF.

. Automatically retract seat on entry

cannot be selected when the Driver

Monitoring System OFF indicator,

Driver Monitoring System temporary

stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring

System warning is illuminated.

. This function will operate if the seat

is in front of the center of the seat

sliding mechanism.

& How to get the source code

using the Open Source

S07BP09

This product contains Free/Open Source

Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source

code of such FOSS can be found at the

following URL.

http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/

RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0101/

Driver Monitoring System

418

(421,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(422,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(423,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S08

8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 422

8-2. Fuel economy hints........................................ 422

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ....... 422

8-4. Catalytic converter ......................................... 423

8-5. Periodic inspections....................................... 424

8-6. Driving in foreign countries........................... 424

8-7. Frequent driving prevents vehicle battery

from discharging........................................... 424

8-8. Driving tips for AWD models ......................... 425

8-9. On-road and off-road driving......................... 426

Before driving.....................................................427

During driving ....................................................427

After driving ....................................................... 428

8-10. Winter driving ............................................... 428

Operation during cold weather............................ 428

Driving on snowy and icy roads.......................... 430

Corrosion protection........................................... 431

Snow tires ......................................................... 431

Tire chains......................................................... 432

Rocking the vehicle............................................ 432

8-11. Loading your vehicle.....................................433

Vehicle capacity weight ...................................... 433

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 434

Roof rails........................................................... 435

Roof tent............................................................ 435

8-12. Trailer hitch (dealer option) ..........................437

Connecting a trailer............................................ 438

If not towing a trailer.......................................... 440

8-13. Trailer towing .................................................441

Warranties and maintenance .............................. 441

Maximum load limits .......................................... 441

Trailer Hitches.................................................... 444

When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 445

Connecting a trailer............................................ 445

Trailer towing tips .............................................. 446

Driving tips

(424,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

8-1. New vehicle break-in

driving – the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km)

S08AA

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000

rpm except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed, either fast or slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-

celeration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads are

replaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel economy hints

S08AB

The following suggestions will help to save

fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as

possible.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire inflation

pressure label, which is located under

the door latch on the driver’s side. Low

pressure will increase tire wear and fuel

consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (car-

bon monoxide)

S08AC

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a lengthy time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

422

(425,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

8-4. Catalytic converter

S08AD

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,

thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the

catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is

moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring,

backfiring or incomplete combustion),

have your vehicle checked and re-

paired by an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield

of catalytic converter and the exhaust

system.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.,

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

Catalytic converter

423

Driving tips

(426,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

8-5. Periodic inspections

S08AE

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

8-6. Driving in foreign coun-

tries

S08AF

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements”

�P341.

. Comply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

8-7. Frequent driving pre-

vents vehicle battery from

discharging

S08AU

Vehicle batteries are a consumable item. If

the battery charge is not maintained

regularly, the battery will deteriorate and

may require replacement sooner than

expected. The battery is charged by

running the engine. It is recommended to

drive the car for a longer time occasionally

to prevent the vehicle battery from becom-

ing drained, especially if it is regularly

driven only a short time daily (e.g. only 10

minutes) or if it is parked for 10 days or

more. It may be possible to recover the

state of charge and maintain the battery

performance by driving for a longer time (e.

g. more than 30 minutes). If you cannot

drive enough, we recommend to charge

the battery as needed. If no action is taken,

the battery will become discharged. This is

a normal characteristic of any battery.

Periodic inspections

424

(427,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

8-8. Driving tips for AWD

models

S08AG

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all the four tires are not the

same for items (a) to (h), serious

mechanical damage could be

caused to the drivetrain of the

car, and affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drivetrain of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD models

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By

shifting power between the front and rear

wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide

added traction during acceleration and

added engine braking force during decel-

eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging the

AWD system, you should keep the follow-

ing tips in mind.

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips for AWD models

425

Driving tips

(428,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. An AWD model is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive

vehicle. There is little difference in

handling, however, during extremely

sharp turns or sudden braking. There-

fore, when driving down a slope or

turning corners, be sure to reduce your

speed and maintain an ample distance

from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recom-

mended tire pressure is provided on the

tire inflation pressure label, which is

located under the door latch on the

driver’s side.

. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

under hard-driving conditions such as

steep hills or dusty roads will necessi-

tate more frequent replacement of the

following items than that specified in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

– Rear differential gear oil

– Continuously variable transmission

fluid

– Front differential gear oil

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehi-

cle. For detailed information, refer to

“Towing” �P466.

8-9. On-road and off-road

driving

S08AH

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive model could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seatbelt. The driver and all

passengers should fasten their

seatbelts before starting to drive

in order to minimize the chance

of serious injury or death.

. Do not make sharp turns or quick

maneuvers unless absolutely un-

avoidable. Such actions are dan-

gerous, as you may lose control,

possibly resulting in a rollover

which could cause death or ser-

ious injury.

. Whenever strong crosswinds are

present, slow down sufficiently

to maintain control of your vehi-

cle. Remember that your vehicle,

with its higher profile and center

of gravity, is more likely to be

affected by crosswinds than or-

dinary passenger cars.

. Never attempt to drive through

pools and puddles, or roads

flooded with water. Water enter-

ing the engine air intake or the

exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage

your vehicle and may cause it to

stall. In this case, contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately. Re-

gardless of its depth, it can wash

away the ground from under your

tires, resulting in possible loss of

traction and even vehicle roll-

over.

CAUTION

. Frequent driving of an AWD mod-

el under hard-driving conditions

such as rough roads or off roads

will necessitate more frequent

replacement of the following

On-road and off-road driving

426

(429,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

items than that specified in the

maintenance schedule described

in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

– Engine oil

– Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to

your SUBARU while operating it

off-road and not using common

sense precautions such as those

listed here is not eligible for

warranty coverage.

. After driving on gravel roads or

rough roads, check the under-

carriage of the vehicle body for

any damage, deformation, or

paint removal. If you notice any

irregularities, contact a SUBARU

dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility

vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher

ground clearance which enables them to

be used for wide applications including off-

road driving. However, please keep in

mind that your vehicle is neither a conven-

tional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain

vehicle. A higher center of gravity in

relation to the tread width as compared

with ordinary passenger cars makes ve-

hicles of this type more likely to roll over. In

reality, utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles. The high ground clearance of this

vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a

better view of the road and allowing you to

anticipate problems earlier. However, re-

member that your utility vehicle is not

designed for high-speed cornering com-

parable to ordinary passenger cars and

that your vehicle could roll over if you make

a sharp turn at a high speed.

If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain

common sense precautions such as those

in the following list should be taken.

& Before driving

S08AH09

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a

shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and

cell phone or citizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not

piled higher than the seatbacks. During

sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo

could be thrown around in the vehicle

and cause injury. Do not pile heavy

loads on the roof. Those loads raise the

vehicle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this

manual.

& During driving

S08AH10

General precautions:

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas

or over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. A vehicle

can much more easily tip over sideways

than it can end over end. Avoid driving

straight up or down slopes that are too

steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk

the wheel and injure your hands.

Instead, drive with your fingers and

thumbs on the outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or park over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass

or fallen leaves, as they may burn

– CONTINUED –

On-road and off-road driving

427

Driving tips

(430,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

easily. The exhaust system is very hot

while the engine is running and right

after the engine stops. This could

create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under espe-

cially dangerous situations:

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the

select lever back and forth between

“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying

to free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction

by starting the vehicle with the trans-

mission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to

“Selection of manual mode” �P363.

& After driving

S08AH11

. Always check your brakes for effective-

ness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal.

Repeat that process several times to

dry out the brake discs and brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that

there is no grass, bush, paper, rags,

stones, sand, etc. adhering to or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the underbody. If

the vehicle is used with these materials

trapped or adhering to the underbody, a

mechanical breakdown or fire could

occur.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components

are particularly prone to dirt buildup, so

they need to be washed thoroughly.

8-10. Winter driving

S08AI

& Operation during cold weath-

S08AI01

! Maintenance

S08AI0105

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,

a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

Winter driving

428

(431,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

the vehicle.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

S08AI0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and driving

dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid making

steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

S08AI0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads heavily

covered with snow, or has been

left parked during a snowstorm,

icing may develop on the brake

system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or

ice buildup on the suspension,

disc brakes and brake hoses

underneath the vehicle. If there

is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the

disc brakes, brake hoses or ABS

harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. Place the select lever in the “P”

position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

– CONTINUED –

Winter driving

429

Driving tips

(432,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Refueling in cold weather

S08AI0103

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

! Opening rear gate (models with

power rear gate)

S08AI0104

CAUTION

Before operating the power rear

gate, check that there is no frost or

snow between the power rear gate

and the vehicle body. If you notice

frost or snow on the power rear gate,

remove it. If you forcibly operate the

power rear gate with frost or snow, it

may cause a malfunction.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

S08AI02

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-

mance on snowy and icy roads. For

information on braking on slippery sur-

faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)” �P369 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control system” �P371.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing

S08AI0201

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the

windshield or rear window, perform the

following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the

airflow selection in “

” and the tem-

perature set for maximum warmth until

the wiper blade rubbers are completely

thawed. Refer to “Climate control”

�P281.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer

to “Defogger and deicer” �P276.

. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,

use the rear window defogger. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” �P276.

Winter driving

430

(433,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer” �P248.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the

vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer

to “Hazard warning flasher” �P170.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and freez-

ing temperatures. Blades of this type give

superior wiping performance in snowy

conditions. Be sure to use blades that are

suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protection

S08AI03

Refer to “Corrosion protection” �P480.

& Snow tires

S08AI04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-

ter tire(s), all four tires must be

the same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all the four tires are not the

same for items (a) to (h), serious

mechanical damage could be

caused to the drivetrain of the

car, and affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” as original equipment, which are

designed to provide an adequate measure

of traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving. In winter, it

may be possible to enhance performance

through use of tires designed specifically

for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

– CONTINUED –

Winter driving

431

Driving tips

(434,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

& Tire chains

S08AI05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of clear-

ance between the tires and vehicle

body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of

another type of traction device (such as

spring chains) may be acceptable if use

on your vehicle is recommended by the

device manufacturer, taking into ac-

count tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with a

traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

S08AI06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the select

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the

best possible traction, avoid spinning the

wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission in

2nd than 1st.

For information about holding the trans-

mission in the 2nd position, refer to

“Selection of manual mode” �P363.

Winter driving

432

(435,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

8-11. Loading your vehicle

S08AJ

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on a folded rear seatback in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

WARNING

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

S08AJ01

– CONTINUED –

Loading your vehicle

433

Driving tips

(436,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

S08AJ02

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation. The GVWR

equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle – including standard equipment,

fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

assembly) plus the vehicle capacity

weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each

axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle

scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Loading your vehicle

434

(437,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Roof rails

S08AJ04

1 Roof rails

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the roof crossbars to the roof rails

and installing the appropriate carrying

attachments. When installing the roof

crossbars and the carrying attachments,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions. The

roof rail system is designed to carry loads

(cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attach-

ments) of no more than 176 lbs (80 kg). Be

sure not to exceed your vehicle’s GVWR

and GAWR.

CAUTION

. When using the carrying attach-

ments, make sure that the total

carrying load of the cargo, roof

crossbars and carrying attach-

ments does not exceed 176 lbs

(80 kg). Overloading may cause

damage to the vehicle. Read the

manufacturer’s instructions and

pay attention to not exceed the

load limit of the parts.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rails must be used together

with the SUBARU recommended

roof crossbars and any appropri-

ate carrying attachment that may

be needed. The roof rails must

never be used alone to carry

cargo. Otherwise, damage to the

roof or paint, or a dangerous road

hazard due to loss of cargo could

result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

& Roof tent

S08AJ14

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof

can adversely affect handling, brak-

ing, and rollover resistance. The

vehicle must never be driven with a

total roof rail load in excess of 176

lbs (80 kg).

CAUTION

. The roof rail load limit for sta-

tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))

applies only when the vehicle is

parked and the load is evenly

distributed left/right and front/

rear and the roof crossbars and

– CONTINUED –

Loading your vehicle

435

Driving tips

(438,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

roof tent are tightly secured to

the vehicle. If these conditions

are not met, the load limit will be

lower.

. The maximum load limit of the

roof crossbars must be obtained

from the manufacturer or retailer

of the roof rack. When driving the

vehicle, the maximum roof rail

load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the

crossbar load limit (whichever is

lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain

conditions at your own risk.

! When driving the vehicle

S08AJ1401

The total weight on the roof rails, including

the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not

exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176

lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

A: Roof rails

B: Roof crossbars

C: Roof tent

B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

! When the vehicle is parked on level

ground

S08AJ1402

A: Roof rails

B: Roof crossbars

C: Roof tent

D: Occupants in the roof tent

Loading your vehicle

436

(439,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The total weight on the roof rails –

including the roof crossbars, roof tent,

and all occupants and contents in the roof

tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s

roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly

distributed, or the load limit of the roof

crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A).

B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause

damage to the vehicle or racking system.

The vehicle must never be driven with

occupants in the roof tent. Before the

vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo

must be removed from the roof tent and

the roof rail load must be restored to within

the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).

Refer to the user manual that accompa-

nied the roof tent for important safety

information and instructions on the proper

installation and use of the tent.

8-12. Trailer hitch (dealer op-

tion)

S08AK

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. For possible recommenda-

tions and limitations, refer to

“Trailer towing” �P441.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has

safety chains and that each chain

will hold the trailer’s maximum

gross weight. Towing trailers

without safety chains could cre-

ate a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch

due to coupling damage or hitch

ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pin for positive locking

placement before towing a trailer.

If the ball mount comes off the

hitch receiver, the trailer could

get loose and create a traffic

safety hazard.

. Although towing regulations for

trailer or caravan vehicles vary

by state/region, all regulations

agree that specifications such

as the maximum gross trailer

weight must not exceed the les-

ser of the following:

– Maximum gross trailer weight

– Maximum gross tongue

weight

– GVWR

– GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will

also negate your insurance cov-

erage and/or may violate the state

road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

. The standard bumper beam must

be installed after you remove the

trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

dealer for purchase of a standard

– CONTINUED –

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

437

Driving tips

(440,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

bumper beam if you do not have

the original.

. Safety performance is decreased

and there is increased risk of

injury to passengers in the case

of an accident if the trailer hitch

or a standard bumper beam is not

installed. One of them must al-

ways be installed on the vehicle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is

not possible to install the rear

towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

Models with air-cooled continuously variable

transmission fluid cooler*

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)

500 lbs (227 kg)

Models without air-cooled continuously variable

transmission fluid cooler*

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

200 lbs (91 kg)

*1: Continuously variable transmission type

TR690SXXXX (To check the model number

label for the continuously variable transmis-

sion type, refer to “Vehicle identification”

�P535.)

*2: Continuously variable transmission type

TR690GXXXX (To check the model number

label for the continuously variable transmis-

sion type, refer to “Vehicle identification”

�P535.)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing” �P441.

& Connecting a trailer

S08AK01

1. Remove the 2 clips from the bottom of

the cover.

NOTE

Looking under the cover from bottom,

there are 2 clips fixed under the cover

fastened on each side.

Remove the clips one by one that are

fastened under the vehicle.

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

438

(441,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

2. Remove the cover.

NOTE

Pull the bottom of the cover from where

the triangle mark “

” is located to

remove it.

1 Ball mount

2 Hitch pin

3 Safety clip

A Hitch receiver tube

3. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

receiver tube.

4. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located

on the hitch receiver tube so that the

pin passes through the ball mount.

5. Insert the safety clip to the groove on

the hitch pin securely.

6. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not

come off the hitch receiver.

1 Hitch ball installation point

2 Hooks for safety chains

7. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball

that is appropriate for the ball mount

and your trailer. The hitch ball must be

securely installed on the ball mount.

8. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

9. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

– CONTINUED –

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

439

Driving tips

(442,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto

the ground in case it should disconnect

from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient

slack in the chains taking tight turn

situations into account; however, be

careful not to let them drag on the

ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the

safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector (7-pin type)

Hitch harness connector (4-pin type)

10. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

4-pin or 7-pin wire connector to the

towing trailer’s wire harness.

11. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating

the brake, stop and turn signal lights on

the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& If not towing a trailer

S08AK02

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver

cover onto the hitch receiver tube and/

or install bumper cover.

. Place the dust cap over the 4-pin or 7-

pin connector of the hitch wire harness

to protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

4-pin or 7-pin connector using terminal

grease.

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

440

(443,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

8-13. Trailer towing

S08AL

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle.

Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and

always consider the following conditions.

. Road conditions

. Weather conditions

. Vehicle load weight

. Trailer load weight

Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to

assist you in purchasing a hitch and other

necessary towing equipment appropriate

for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-

ment other than genuine SUBARU towing

equipment. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions for proper installation and

use provided by the trailer or caravan’s

manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

& Warranties and maintenance

S08AL01

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused by

trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow

a trailer, more frequent maintenance will

be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer be

towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with

any new powertrain component (engine,

transmission, differential, wheel bearings,

etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

driving.

& Maximum load limits

S08AL02

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

! Total trailer weight

S08AL0201

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum total trailer weight in the follow-

ing table.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

441

Driving tips

(444,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes.

Models with air-cooled continuously variable

transmission fluid cooler*

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)

Models without air-cooled continuously variable

transmission fluid cooler*

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

*1: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the

continuously variable transmission type, refer to “

Vehicle identification” �P535.)

*2: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the

continuously variable transmission type, refer to “

Vehicle identification” �P535.)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

S08AL0202

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-

bined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Trailer towing

442

(445,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Certification label

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by

SUBARU is shown on the certification

label located at the bottom of driver’s side

door pillar of your vehicle.

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

S08AL0203

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR of your

vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also

shown on the certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

S08AL0204

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8

to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and

does not exceed the maximum value of the

following.

. Models with air-cooled continuously

variable transmission fluid cooler: 500

lbs (227 kg)

. Models without air-cooled continuously

variable transmission fluid cooler: 200

lbs (91 kg)

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

443

Driving tips

(446,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Jack

2 Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load, be

sure to position the towing coupler at the

height at which it would be during actual

towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper

distribution of the load in the trailer. Never

load the trailer with more weight in the

back than in the front; approximately 60

percent of the trailer load should be in the

front and approximately 40 percent in the

rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as

possible on both the left and right sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer Hitches

S08AL03

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

Trailer towing

444

(447,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU trailer hitch is available from

your SUBARU dealer.

& When you do not tow a trailer

S08AL14

CAUTION

. The housing should be kept dirt

and corrosion-free at the points

of contact. The surfaces only

require cleaning with a cloth.

Grease or other lubricants

should never be used.

. If the ball is not installed, the

plastic insert and/or bumper cov-

er should then be installed for

protection and to prevent it from

getting dirty.

When the ball is not used, place the ball

cap and store securely.

& Connecting a trailer

S08AL04

! Trailer brakes

S08AL0401

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-

commended, and must be installed prop-

erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-

form with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

S08AL0402

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trailer

tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping

onto the ground in case the trailer tongue

should disconnect from the hitch ball.

Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking

tight turn situations into account; however,

be careful not to let them drag on the

ground.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

445

Driving tips

(448,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Side mirrors

S08AL0403

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

S08AL0404

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s

electrical system requires modifications to

the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its

capacity and accommodate wiring

changes. To ensure the trailer lights are

connected properly, please consult your

SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-

tion of the turn signals and the brake lights

each time you connect a trailer to your

vehicle.

! Tires

S08AL0405

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tempor-

ary spare tire is used. The temporary

spare tire is not designed to sustain

the towing load. Use of the tempor-

ary spare tire when towing can result

in failure of the spare tire and/or less

stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”

�P530.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications. Also check federal, state,

province and/or other applicable regula-

tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representative or profes-

sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire

is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

S08AL05

CAUTION

. For models equipped with the

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

driving support systems, when

towing a trailer, touch “Rear Ve-

hicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)” to

deactivate the system. The sys-

tem may not operate properly due

to the blocked radar waves. For

details about how to turn on/off

the BSD/RCTA, refer to “Car set-

tings” �P218.

. For models equipped with Re-

verse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system, consult your SUBARU

dealer for additional information

about towing a trailer.

. Towing a trailer in high tempera-

Trailer towing

446

(449,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

tures, or on long or steep grades,

may cause the vehicle to over-

heat. Refer to “Engine overheat-

ing” �P465.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent when compared to normal

operation. For safety’s sake, you

should employ extra caution

when towing a trailer and you

should never drive at excessive

speeds. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

. When parking on a steep slope

with a trailer attached to your

vehicle, the braking power of the

electronic parking brake may not

be sufficient since strong braking

power is needed.

! Before starting out on a trip

S08AL0501

. Check the towing regulations for trailer

or caravan vehicles that vary by state/

region. Failure to comply with the

procedures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will also

negate your insurance coverage and/or

may violate the state road and traffic

acts and regulations.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow

the trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the

vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front

and down at the rear, check the total

trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue

load again, then confirm that the load

and its distribution are acceptable.

. Check that the tire rating and pressures

are correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that:

– The trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– The trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’s brake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is

operated.

– The safety chains are connected

properly.

– All cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– The side mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a

significant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combina-

tion before starting out on a trip. In an

area free of traffic, practice turning,

stopping and backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

S08AL0502

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss

of control.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius be-

cause the trailer wheels will be closer

than the vehicle wheels to the inside of

the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could

hit your vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer,

causing sway. Crosswinds can be due

to weather conditions or the passing of

large trucks or buses. If swaying oc-

curs, firmly grip the steering wheel and

promptly begin decelerating your vehi-

cle at a gradual pace.

. When passing other vehicles, consider-

able distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can

be difficult and requires experience.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing

447

Driving tips

(450,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and

grip the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand.

To reverse around a corner, perform the

following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-

site direction to the way you want to

turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing

around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

tion.

4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line

with the trailer, then straighten the

steering again.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop

towing the trailer and have repairs

performed immediately by your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

! Driving on grades

S08AL0503

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift to a lower gear (if

necessary, use 1st gear) in order to

utilize the engine braking effect and

prevent overheating of your vehicle’s

brakes. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automati-

cally to protect the engine from over-

heating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the following items because

the engine and transmission are rela-

tively prone to overheating.

Temperature gauge

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

: Rear differential oil temperature warn-

ing light (if equipped)

If any of the following conditions occur,

immediately turn off the air conditioner and

stop the vehicle in the nearest safe

location. For further instructions and addi-

tional information, refer to the following

sections.

– “If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency” �P452

– “Engine overheating” �P465

– Temperature gauge needle ap-

proaches the OVERHEAT zone.

Refer to “Engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge” �P172.

– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP

warning light” �P180.

– Rear differential oil temperature

warning light (if equipped) illumi-

nate. Refer to “Rear differential oil

temperature warning light” �P180.

. Avoid using the accelerator pedal to

stay stationary on an uphill slope

instead of using the parking brake or

foot brake. That may cause the trans-

mission fluid to overheat.

Trailer towing

448

(451,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Parking on a grade

S08AL0504

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until

the blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into “P” position and shut off the

engine.

Trailer towing

449

Driving tips

(452,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(453,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S09

9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency................................................ 452

9-2. Maintenance tools .......................................... 452

Jack and jack handle .......................................... 453

9-3. Spare tire......................................................... 453

Removing the spare tire...................................... 453

Re-storage of spare tire ......................................456

9-4. Temporary spare tire ...................................... 457

9-5. Flat tires .......................................................... 458

Changing a flat tire .............................................458

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models)...........................................461

9-6. Jump starting.................................................. 463

How to jump start ............................................... 464

9-7. Engine overheating ........................................ 465

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment ....................................................465

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ....................................................465

9-8. Towing ............................................................. 466

Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............. 466

Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 468

Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 469

9-9. Electronic parking brake – if the electronic

parking brake cannot be released ...............470

9-10. Access key fob – if access key fob does

not operate properly .....................................470

Locking and unlocking ....................................... 471

Switching power status ...................................... 471

Starting engine .................................................. 471

9-11. Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

opened ...........................................................472

9-12. Malfunctions of the center information

display............................................................473

9-13. Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof

does not close...............................................474

9-14. If your vehicle is involved in an accident ...475

To restart the engine when involved in

an accident ...................................................... 475

Automatic door locking/unlocking operation

when involved in an accident ........................... 475

In case of emergency

(454,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

9-1. If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency

S09AA

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the

hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off

by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Maintenance tools

S09AH

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

1 Extension62

2 Wheel nut wrench

3 Jack handle

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

452

(455,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4 Jack

5 Screwdriver

6 Towing hook (eye bolt)

& Jack and jack handle

S09AH04

The jack and jack handle is stored under

the cargo area.

For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”

�P458.

9-3. Spare tire

S09AK

The spare tire is stored in the spare tire

holder located under the cargo area.

The spare tire holder has a hoist mechan-

ism that can lower and raise the spare tire

easily.

The spare tire holder is designed to carry

only the following kinds of tires.

. The temporary spare tire that came with

your vehicle

. A full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the

spare tire holder in an emergency only.

After having the full-size flat tire repaired,

immediately swap it with the temporary

spare tire.

Before using the temporary spare tire,

carefully read “Temporary spare tire”

�P457 for instructions and precautions.

& Removing the spare tire

S09AK01

1. Take the wheel nut wrench, screwdri-

ver, and extension out of the tool box.

Refer to “Maintenance tools” �P452.

2. Remove the subfloor storage lid in the

cargo area.

3. Take out the jack.

– CONTINUED –

Spare tire

453

In case of emergency

(456,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4. Open the cover located at the center of

the luggage floor by screwdriver.

5. Remove the rubber cap.

6. Fit the two extensions onto the hex-

head hoist shaft end.

7. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the

extension.

8. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock-

wise with the wheel nut wrench until

the cable is extracted fully.

CAUTION

. Be sure to remove (not simply

keep it open) the subfloor storage

lid before turning the wheel nut

wrench, otherwise the lid may be

damaged.

. Do not put your fingers into the

center hole of the temporary

spare tire while pulling it out,

because they might be pinched

in between the wheel and the

retainer.

Spare tire

454

(457,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

9. Tilt up the spare tire, then remove the

tire retainer as showing in the figure.

10. After the temporary spare tire is re-

moved from the cable, the cable must

be wound up completely by turning the

hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear

a clicking sound. Also visually inspect

the cable to make certain that there is

no longer any slack present.

WARNING

. Do not use the extension when

turning the wheel nuts. If you did,

you would not be able to achieve

sufficient tightening torque. The

wheel nuts could then come

loose, resulting in a serious acci-

dent.

. When using the spare tire hoist:

After the temporary spare tire is

removed from the cable, wind the

cable up completely until the

retainer at end of the cable sits

against the underside of the ve-

hicle. Driving with the cable not

retracted fully could result in

damage to the adjacent under

floor parts and lead to a serious

accident.

. The spare tire holder is designed

to carry only the following kinds

of tires.

– The temporary spare tire that

came with your vehicle

– A full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder

in an emergency only. After hav-

ing the full-size flat tire repaired,

immediately swap it with the

temporary spare tire.

Never stow a full-size tire that is

not flat in the spare tire holder.

Doing so can result in damage to

adjacent under floor parts and

can lead to a serious accident.

– CONTINUED –

Spare tire

455

In case of emergency

(458,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

When using the spare tire hoist:

Do not use air tools or power tools to

turn the spare tire hoist shaft end. If

you do, it could result in severe

mechanical damage to the spare tire

hoist.

& Re-storage of spare tire

S09AK02

1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end

counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently

enough to allow the cable end retainer

go through center hole of the tempor-

ary spare tire.

2. Insert the retainer through the center

hole of the temporary tire as showing in

the figure.

3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with

the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable

up completely until you hear a few

clicking sounds. Confirm that the tem-

porary spare tire holding cable has

been wound up completely by shaking

the temporary tire.

CAUTION

If the temporary spare tire is not

stored securely, it could damage

adjacent areas of the vehicle and

make an abnormal noise.

4. Install the rubber cap.

5. Install the cover.

6. Store the wheel nut wrench, two

extensions, jack and jack handle in

Spare tire

456

(459,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

their storage locations.

7. Fit the lid of the cargo area.

CAUTION

. When stowing a flat tire in the

spare tire holder, turn the hoist

shaft end only slowly. If it is

turned quickly, the wheel disc of

the flat tire could be damaged.

. A full-size flat tire should be

stowed in the spare tire holder

in an emergency only. After hav-

ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-

ately swap it with the temporary

spare tire.

. Remember that the tread width of

a flat tire is wider than that of the

temporary spare tire. When car-

rying a flat tire stowed in the

spare tire holder, make sure the

tire does not touch any obsta-

cles.

9-4. Temporary spare tire

S09AB

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drivetrain of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. For the correct tire

pressure, refer to “Temporary spare tires”

�P531.

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Drive with caution when the temporary

spare tire is installed. Avoid hard

acceleration and braking, or fast cor-

nering, as control of the vehicle may be

lost.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire

size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

– CONTINUED –

Temporary spare tire

457

In case of emergency

(460,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clear-

ance is reduced.

1 Tread wear indicator bar

2 Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with

a rear wheel and install the temporary

spare tire in place of the removed rear

wheel.

9-5. Flat tires

S09AC

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

S09AC01

WARNING

. Use only the jack and the jack

handle provided with your vehi-

cle. The jack supplied with the

vehicle is designed only for chan-

ging a tire. Never put any part of

your body under the vehicle while

the vehicle is being supported by

the jack. Doing so could result in

serious injury or death.

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink into the

ground and this can result in

serious injury or death.

. Before jacking up the vehicle, be

sure that there are no occupants

or cargo on board.

. Do not jack up the vehicle with an

object on or underneath the jack.

The jack can be unstable and this

can result in a severe accident.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of

the jacking point due to a jolt and

this can result in serious injury or

death.

. All passengers must exit the

vehicle before you raise it with

the jack. Raising the vehicle with

someone inside of it could result

in serious injury or death.

. Do not start the vehicle while it is

supported by the jack. Doing so

could result in serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rotor

backing plate when removing and

installing the tire. A bent backing

plate may scrape against the disc

rotor and cause noise while the

vehicle is in motion.

Flat tires

458

(461,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

NOTE

Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking

up the vehicle using a garage jack.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake securely and

shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

unload all occupants and luggage from

the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat

tire.

1 Wheel nut wrench

2 Jack handle

3 Jack

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools are stored under the cargo

area. Refer to “Maintenance tools”

�P452.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubri-

cated before using it.

6. Remove the spare tire.

Refer to “Removing the spare tire”

�P453 and strictly follow the instruc-

tions.

NOTE

If the spare tire provided in your vehicle

is a temporary spare tire, carefully read

“Temporary spare tire” �P457 and

strictly follow the instructions.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

459

In case of emergency

(462,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the

flat tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

9. Insert the jack handle into the hole of

the wheel nut wrench.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the

vehicle higher than necessary.

11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and

hub with a cloth.

13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

Flat tires

460

(463,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts when the spare tire is

installed. This could cause the nuts

to become loose and lead to an

accident.

14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in

the illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque,

refer to “Tires” �P530. Never use your

foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe

extension on the wrench because you

may exceed the specified torque. Have

the wheel nut torque checked at the

nearest automotive service facility.

WARNING

Do not use the extension when

turning the wheel nuts. If you did,

you would not be able to achieve

sufficient tightening torque. The

wheel nuts could then come loose,

resulting in a serious accident.

16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

holder.

Refer to “Removing the spare tire”

�P453 for its location, instructions

and precautions.

17. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel

nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

S09AC02

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires

461

In case of emergency

(464,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the tire inflation

pressure label on the door

pillar on the driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is unable

to monitor all four road wheels.

Contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible for tire and

sensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

Flat tires

462

(465,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

9-6. Jump starting

S09AD

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get med-

ical help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

1 Fuse

WARNING

Never connect the jumper cables to

a fuse near the terminal of the

vehicle battery. Fuses may be da-

maged.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

– CONTINUED –

Jump starting

463

In case of emergency

(466,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& How to jump start

S09AD01

A Booster battery

B Strut mounting nut

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the dis-

charged battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the other cable

to the negative (−) terminal of the

booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut of the

vehicle with the discharged bat-

tery.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any

other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the

Jump starting

464

(467,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

vehicle that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-7. Engine overheating

S09AE

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has

fully cooled down. When the engine

is hot, the coolant is under pressure.

Removing the cap while the engine

is still hot could release a spray of

boiling hot coolant, which could

burn you very seriously.

CAUTION

If the engine overheats, the engine

speed or the vehicle speed may be

reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe

place immediately.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

S09AE01

. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and get everyone away

from the vehicle until it cools down.

. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

& If no steam is coming from the

engine compartment

S09AE02

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment. Refer to “Engine

hood” �P489.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning.

If the fan is not turning, immediately

turn off the engine and contact an

authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine. If the

temperature gauge stays in the over-

heated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank. If the coolant level is below the

“LOW” mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine coolant” �P495.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill

the radiator with coolant.

– CONTINUED –

Engine overheating

465

In case of emergency

(468,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

9-8. Towing

S09AF

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with the

front wheels raised off the ground

while the rear wheels are on the

ground, or with the rear wheels

raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will

cause the vehicle to spin away due

to the operation or deterioration of

the center differential.

& Towing hooks and tie-down

hooks/holes

S09AF01

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hooks

and tie-down hooks/holes. Never

use suspension parts or other parts

of the body for towing or tie-down

purposes.

! Front towing hook

S09AF0112

The front towing hook is located on the

bottom of the body on the front left side of

the vehicle.

Towing

466

(469,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Rear towing hook

S09AF0105

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver

out of the tool bucket. Take the jack

handle out of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover

on the rear bumper using a screwdri-

ver, and you will find a threaded hole

for attaching the towing hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be

seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hook for

purposes other than towing your

vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the fuel pump

shut off function when the vehi-

cle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

. To prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply an excessive load to

the towing hook.

. For models equipped with the

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

driving support systems, when

towing another vehicle, touch

“Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/

RCTA)” to deactivate the system.

The system may not operate

– CONTINUED –

Towing

467

In case of emergency

(470,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

properly due to the blocked radar

waves. For details about how to

turn on/off the Rear Vehicle De-

tection (BSD/RCTA), refer to “Car

settings” �P218.

! Front tie-down hooks

S09AF0106

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

! Rear tie-down holes

S09AF0107

1 Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,

return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

S09AF02

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the “P”

position.

2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

Towing

468

(471,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each

safety chain should be equally tigh-

tened and care must be taken not to

pull the chains so tightly that the

suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle has a bumper

under guard (optional), be careful

not to scrape it when placing the

vehicle on the carrier and when

removing the vehicle from the

carrier.

. Transport by flat-bed truck may

cause the headlights to become

misaligned. In such a case, have

the headlight alignment checked

by a SUBARU dealer after trans-

porting the vehicle by flat-bed

truck.

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

S09AF03

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in the neutral position.

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not run-

ning. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Sometime damaged vehicles can-

not be towed because of their

damaged condition. In that case,

use a flat-bed truck for transpor-

tation.

. The traveling speed must be

limited to less than 20 mph (32

km/h) and the traveling distance

to less than 31 miles (50 km). For

greater speeds and distances,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. Use a flat-bed truck if there are

long distance downgrades or

steep slopes. However, do not

apply the brake pedal for a long

time because the engine braking

will not work while towing. Doing

– CONTINUED –

Towing

469

In case of emergency

(472,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

so could overheat the brake.

. Drive carefully and do not make

an impact on the towing rope by

suddenly starting.

. Use a specific towing rope for

towing. If wire ropes and metal

chains are needed to be used for

towing, wrap the contact portion

of the bumper with cloth to pro-

tect it from damage.

9-9. Electronic parking brake

– if the electronic parking

brake cannot be released

S09AN

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have

your SUBARU dealer release the electro-

nic parking brake.

9-10. Access key fob – if ac-

cess key fob does not operate

properly

S09AP

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key fob and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key fob and the push-

button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or a low battery condition

of the access key fob.

. Locking/unlocking doors (including the

rear gate)

. Switching power status

. Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged, replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access

key fob” �P522.

Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released

470

(473,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Locking and unlocking

S09AP01

1 Release button

2 Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

emergency key in the procedure described

in “Locking and unlocking from the out-

side” �P139.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the emergency key back to the

access key fob.

& Switching power status

S09AP02

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the

push-button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is

completed, a chime (ding) will sound.

At the same time, the status of the

push-button ignition switch changes to

either of the following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated,

press the push-button ignition switch

with the brake pedal released. The

status of the push-button ignition

switch then changes to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting engine

S09AP03

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)

position.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

– CONTINUED –

Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly

471

In case of emergency

(474,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the

push-button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is

completed, a chime (ding) will sound.

At the same time, the push-button

ignition switch turns to the “ACC” or

“ON” position.

5. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position,

while depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though

the above procedure was followed

precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-11. Rear gate – if the rear

gate cannot be opened

S09AG

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by operating the rear gate opener

button, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim

using a flat-head screwdriver wrapped

with vinyl tape or a cloth.

2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind

the rear gate trim.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate open

lever with fingers because doing so

may cause an injury. Always use a

flat-head screwdriver or a similar

tool.

Models without power rear gate

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened

472

(475,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Models with power rear gate

3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to

the right position.

9-12. Malfunctions of the

center information display

S09AV

If the following screens are displayed,

temporary errors or malfunctions may

occur in the center information display.

If they are only temporary errors, the

following procedure may help to eliminate

them.

Shutting down the screen

Freezing the screen

Blacking out the screen

– CONTINUED –

Malfunctions of the center information display

473

In case of emergency

(476,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Error A

Error B

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn the ignition switch once to the

“LOCK/OFF” position, then start the

engine.

1 Volume button

3. If the center information display cannot

be recovered even though the engine

has been restarted, press and hold the

volume button for more than 10 sec-

onds. The center information display

will start up again.

4. If the center information display is not

recovered by restarting it, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

9-13. Moonroof (if equipped)

– if the moonroof does not

S09AJ

If the moonroof does not close, we

recommend that you have the system

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close

474

(477,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

9-14. If your vehicle is in-

volved in an accident

S09AR

& To restart the engine when

involved in an accident

S09AR02

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. We recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an

impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump

shut off system stops supplying the fuel in

order to minimize fuel leakage. However,

depending on the impact conditions at the

time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off

system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to restart

the engine after the system is activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

& Automatic door locking/un-

locking operation when in-

volved in an accident

S09AR03

When the automatic door locking/unlock-

ing function is ON, all the doors will be

locked automatically while driving. For

further details, refer to “Automatic door

locking/unlocking” �P142.

When the vehicle sustains a strong impact

which may trigger the airbags to deploy,

the door locks may be unlocked automa-

tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-

erally, an impact sustained from a rear end

collision does not trigger the airbags to

deploy. However if the impact is strong

enough to deploy the airbags, it can also

trigger the unlocking function.

Under such circumstance, the automatic

door locking/unlocking function will be

suspended and the doors will remain

unlocked.

Confirm the safety of the surroundings first

and carry out the following to retrieve the

automatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ON” position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the im-

pact, the emergency unlocking may not

function.

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may be a

malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a

SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

If your vehicle is involved in an accident

475

In case of emergency

(478,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. The doors unlock automatically

while driving.

. With all doors shut, the doors

unlock when pressing the lock

side of the power door locking

switch.

. The automatic door locking/un-

locking function does not oper-

ate.

If your vehicle is involved in an accident

476

(479,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S10

10-1. Exterior care.................................................. 478

Washing ............................................................. 478

Waxing and polishing .........................................479

Cleaning alloy wheels .........................................480

10-2. Corrosion protection .................................... 480

Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 480

To help prevent corrosion ................................... 481

10-3. Cleaning the interior..................................... 481

Seat fabric.......................................................... 481

Leather seat materials ........................................ 482

Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 482

Water repellent seat material (if equipped) .......... 482

Seatbelt ............................................................. 482

Instrument panel, console panel, switches,

combination meter, rear climate control panel,

and other plastic surfaces ................................ 482

Center information display ................................. 483

Appearance care

(480,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

10-1. Exterior care

S10AA

& Washing

S10AA01

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly depressing the brake ped-

al to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of electrical equipment.

. When washing inner fenders, un-

derbody, bumpers and protrud-

ing objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to prevent injuries from

contacting sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

. Models with the automatic rain

sensing windshield wipers:

When washing the vehicle, turn

off the wipers. If the wiper switch

is in the “AUTO” position, the

wipers may operate unexpect-

edly while washing the vehicle

and cause injury.

. When washing a vehicle

equipped with the automatic rain

sensing windshield wipers, make

sure that the wipers are turned

off. If the wiper switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the wipers may

operate unexpectedly while

washing the vehicle and the wi-

per blades could be damaged.

. If the climate control system is

operating when you wash the

vehicle, do not set the air inlet

selection of the climate control to

outside air circulation mode.

There is a risk that water may

enter the vehicle through the air

inlets.

NOTE

. When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

. The rear view camera lens has a hard

coating to help prevent scratches.

However, when washing the vehicle

or cleaning the camera lens, be

careful not to scratch the camera

lens. Do not use a washing brush

directly on the camera lens. The

image quality of the rear view cam-

era may deteriorate.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the

vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-

light.

Exterior care

478

(481,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,

and bird droppings should be washed off

using a light detergent, as required. If you

use a light detergent, make certain that it is

a neutral detergent. Do not use strong

soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning

agents should be promptly flushed from

the surface and not allowed to dry there.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water

off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear

rubber gloves and use a hand brush when

washing down underbody, inner fenders

and suspension to effectively remove mud

and dirt off.

! Washing the underbody

S10AA0101

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,

floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside

of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water

at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful

effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody. Carefully flush the suspension

and axle parts, as they are particularly

prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use

a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

S10AA0102

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle

and the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers

are of the high temperature, high

pressure type, and they can damage

or deform the resin parts such as

moldings, or cause water to leak into

the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

S10AA02

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always

polish in only one direction. A No. 2000

grain compound is recommended. Never

use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

– CONTINUED –

Exterior care

479

Appearance care

(482,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

. Be careful not to block the wind-

shield washer nozzles with wax

when waxing the vehicle.

. Do not wipe the rear view camera

with alcohol, benzine or paint thin-

ner. Otherwise, discoloration may

occur. To remove contamination,

wipe the camera with a cloth mois-

tened with diluted neutral detergent

and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the rear view

camera. If it comes in contact with

the camera, moisten a clean cloth

with diluted neutral detergent to

remove the wax.

& Cleaning alloy wheels

S10AA04

. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of

any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left

on too long, it may be difficult to clean

off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thor-

oughly with water. Do not clean the

wheels with a stiff brush or expose them

to a high-speed washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possible

when it has been splashed with sea

water, exposed to sea breezes, or

driven on roads treated with salt or

other agents.

10-2. Corrosion protection

S10AB

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of cor-

rosion

S10AB01

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas

where there is more salt in the air, or in

areas where there is considerable

industrial pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range

just above freezing.

Corrosion protection

480

(483,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Dampness in certain parts of the

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To help prevent corrosion

S10AB02

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and suspension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

. Roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. Mud, sand, or gravel

. Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-

age. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the interior

S10AC

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may damage

the conductors printed on the win-

dow.

& Seat fabric

S10AC01

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung

cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If

the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution

of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry

thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner.

Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

– CONTINUED –

Cleaning the interior

481

Appearance care

(484,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

make sure it does not affect the fabric

adversely. Use the cleaner according to its

instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather seat materials

S10AC02

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause leather to become

brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain

its resiliency, leather should be cleaned

monthly or whenever it becomes soiled.

Before cleaning leather upholstery, va-

cuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and

lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm

water and mild soap, taking care not to

soak the leather or allow water to pene-

trate the stitched seams. Use a gentle

circular motion while cleaning the leather -

do not rub or apply extreme pressure.

Wipe the leather again with another clean,

slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue

and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt

spots may be treated with a commercial

leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning

solvents, leather oils, varnishes or

polishes on your leather as it will dry out

the leather finish.

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

You will discover that each leather seat

section will develop soft folds or wrinkles,

which is characteristic of genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

S10AC03

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or fuel must never be used

on leather or synthetic interior ma-

terials. Doing so could damage the

surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Water repellent seat material

(if equipped)

S10AC10

The water repellency of the seat fabric will

decrease over time. Do not apply addi-

tional water repellent coating.

& Seatbelt

S10AC09

For details about how to clean the seatbelt,

refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” �P61.

& Instrument panel, console

panel, switches, combination

meter, rear climate control

panel, and other plastic sur-

faces

S10AC04

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or fuel, or

Cleaning the interior

482

(485,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents that

contain silicone on the vehicle

audio system, electrical compo-

nents of the air-conditioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

& Center information display

S10AC11

To clean the center information display,

wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft

cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,

clean it with a soft cloth moistened with

neutral detergent then carefully wipe off

any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the monitor. Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, fuel, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches at the

bottom of the monitor.

Cleaning the interior

483

Appearance care

(486,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(487,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S11

11-1. Maintenance schedule.................................. 487

11-2. Maintenance precautions ............................. 487

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ....................................................488

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ....................................................489

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running.......... 489

11-3. Engine hood .................................................. 489

11-4. Engine compartment overview .................... 491

11-5. Engine oil....................................................... 492

Engine oil consumption ......................................492

Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap

and oil filter ...................................................... 492

Checking the oil level .........................................492

Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 494

Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 494

Synthetic oil ....................................................... 494

11-6. Cooling system ............................................. 495

Safety precautions.............................................. 495

Cooling fan, hose and connections .....................495

Engine coolant ...................................................495

11-7. Air cleaner element....................................... 497

Replacing the air cleaner element .......................497

11-8. Spark plugs ................................................... 498

Recommended spark plugs................................. 498

11-9. Drive belt ....................................................... 498

11-10. Continuously variable transmission

fluid ................................................................ 499

11-11. Front differential gear oil and rear

differential gear oil........................................499

Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 499

11-12. Brake fluid ....................................................499

Checking the fluid level...................................... 499

Recommended brake fluid.................................. 500

11-13. Brake pedal ..................................................500

11-14. Replacement of brake pad..........................501

Breaking-in of new brake pads ........................... 501

11-15. Tires and wheels..........................................501

Types of tires ..................................................... 501

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped)..................................................... 502

Tire inspection ................................................... 503

Tire pressures and wear..................................... 504

Wheel balance.................................................... 505

Wear indicators .................................................. 506

Rotational direction of tires ................................ 507

Tire rotation ....................................................... 507

Tire replacement ................................................ 508

Wheel replacement............................................. 508

11-16. Alloy wheels.................................................509

11-17. Windshield washer fluid..............................509

Adding the windshield washer fluid.................... 510

Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 510

11-18. Replacement of wiper blades .....................510

Windshield wiper blade assembly....................... 511

Window wiper blade rubber................................ 512

Rear window wiper blade assembly.................... 513

Rear window wiper blade rubber ........................ 513

Maintenance and service

(488,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-19. Battery ......................................................... 515

11-20. Fuses ........................................................... 516

11-21. Installation of accessories ......................... 517

11-22. Replacing bulbs .......................................... 517

Headlights .......................................................... 518

Front turn signal light ......................................... 518

Rear combination lights ...................................... 519

License plate light.............................................. 521

Other bulbs........................................................ 521

11-23. Replacing key battery .................................521

Safety precautions ............................................. 521

Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 522

Replacing battery of transmitter ......................... 523

Maintenance and service

(489,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-1. Maintenance schedule

S11AA

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required to

be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

11-2. Maintenance precau-

tions

S11AB

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by

yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this sec-

tion on general maintenance and service

for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance schedule

487

Maintenance and service

(490,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-

ter for these wiring. If your SRS

airbag or seatbelt pretensioner

needs service, consult your near-

est SUBARU dealer.

. Check the inside of the engine

compartment to see if there are

any cloths and tools left. If they

are left inside, they may be a

cause of malfunction and fire.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

S11AB01

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine has stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even when

the engine is stopped. If your

body or clothes come into con-

tact with a rotating fan, that could

result in serious injury. To avoid

risk of injury, perform the follow-

ing precautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key fob out from

the vehicle.

– Models without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system (a

dealer option), temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent it from

unexpectedly starting the engine.

Maintenance precautions

488

(491,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

S11AB03

CAUTION

. Do not contact the drive belt

cover while checking the compo-

nents in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause your hand to

slip off the cover and result in an

unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a burn

or other injury. Note that the oil

filter becomes very hot when the

engine is running and remains

hot for some time after the engine

has stopped.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

while the engine is running

S11AB02

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

11-3. Engine hood

S11AC

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, the

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

. Check that the end of the hood

prop is inserted into the slot. If it

is not inserted properly, the hood

may drop and cause injury.

– CONTINUED –

Engine hood

489

Maintenance and service

(492,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front

grille and the hood toward the left.

1 Grip

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Hold the grip to handle the hood prop.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm)

above its closed position and then let it

drop.

3. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicle is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Engine hood

490

(493,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-4. Engine compartment overview

S11AD

1 Brake fluid reservoir (page 499)

2 Fuse box (page 516)

3 Windshield washer tank (page 509)

4 Battery (page 515)

5 Engine oil filler cap (page 492)

6 Radiator cap (page 495)

7 Engine coolant reservoir (page 495)

8 Engine oil filter (page 494)

9 Engine oil level gauge (page 492)

10 Air cleaner case (page 497)

Engine compartment overview

491

Maintenance and service

(494,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-5. Engine oil

S11AE

CAUTION

. If the level gauge cannot be

pulled out easily, twist the level

gauge right and left, then gently

pull it out. Otherwise, you may be

injured accidentally straining

yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine oil consumption

S11AE07

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and may

require refilling between maintenance in-

tervals.

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods of

time)

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of

time)

. When towing a trailer

. When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop-

and-go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

. When the vehicle accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more

frequently. Different drivers in the same

car may experience different results. If

your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU dealer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

& Locations of the oil level

gauge, oil filler cap and oil

filter

S11AE06

1 Oil level gauge

2 Oil filler cap

3 Oil filter

& Checking the oil level

S11AE01

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. If you check the oil

level just after turning the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position,

wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before

checking the level.

Engine oil

492

(495,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pulled

out easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, then gently pull it out.

Otherwise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

1 Full level

2 Low level

3 Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9

Imp qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must

be judged by the lowest of the two

levels. If the oil level is below the low

level mark, add oil so that the full level

is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engine

oil filter when removing the oil

filler cap. Doing so may result in a

burn, a pinched finger, or may

cause some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,

do not add any additional oil above

the upper level when the engine is

cold.

. The engine low oil level warning light

may stay illuminated when the en-

gine is started straight after topping

up or changing the engine oil. In

such cases, park the vehicle on a

level surface and wait for more than

a minute until the oil level settles,

after which the warning light will turn

off. Refer to “Engine low oil level

warning light” �P180.

– CONTINUED –

Engine oil

493

Maintenance and service

(496,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Changing the oil and oil filter

S11AE02

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in ex-

tremely cold weather.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-

trained expert. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for changing the

engine oil and oil filter. Fully trained

mechanics are on standby at a

SUBARU dealer to utilize the special

tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also,

used oils are properly disposed of.

. If performing oil replacement your-

self, observe the local regulations

and dispose of waste oil properly.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

S11AE03

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” �P527.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

& Synthetic oil

S11AE05

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using syn-

thetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

oil” �P527. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Engine oil

494

(497,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-6. Cooling system

S11AF

& Safety precautions

S11AF04

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has

cooled down completely. Since the

coolant is under pressure, you may

suffer serious burns from a spray of

boiling hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

that does not require the first

change for 11 years/137,500

miles (11 years/220,000 km). This

coolant should not be mixed with

any other brand or type of cool-

ant during this period. Mixing

with a different coolant will re-

duce the life of the coolant. When

necessary add up the coolant for

any reason, use only SUBARU

SUPER COOLANT.

If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is

diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

S11AF03

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

1 Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be

defective. Refer to “Engine coolant tem-

perature gauge” �P172.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” �P516.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling

system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant is

necessary between vehicle service visits,

it is recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da-

mage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

S11AF02

! Checking the coolant level

S11AF0201

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until

the engine has been shut off and has

cooled down completely. Since the

coolant is under pressure, you may

suffer serious burns from a spray of

boiling hot coolant when the cap is

removed.

– CONTINUED –

Cooling system

495

Maintenance and service

(498,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 “FULL” level mark

2 “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is

cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to

the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve

tank is empty, remove the radiator cap

and refill coolant up to just below the

filler neck as shown in the following

illustration.

1 Fill up to this level.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check

that the rubber gaskets inside the

radiator cap are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

S11AF0202

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Cooling system

496

(499,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-7. Air cleaner element

S11AG

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the

engine backfires, you could be

burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used, it

will cause a negative effect to the

engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter

screen. When the element is perforated or

removed, engine wear will be excessive

and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

& Replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment

S11AG01

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1 Clips

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

(both front and rear) with a damp cloth

and install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

– CONTINUED –

Air cleaner element

497

Maintenance and service

(500,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the

air cleaner case (front).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that

the surface with “UPR” printed on it

faces upward.

11-8. Spark plugs

S11AH

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have the

spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced in

the correct order.

& Recommended spark plugs

S11AH01

For the recommended spark plugs, refer to

“Electrical system” �P530.

11-9. Drive belt

S11AI

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement of

the belt should be done according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

Spark plugs

498

(501,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-10. Continuously variable

transmission fluid

S11AY

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion fluid level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

fluid inspection should be performed ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

11-11. Front differential gear

oil and rear differential gear

oil

S11BL

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

S11BL01

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to “Front

differential and rear differential gear oil”

�P529.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

11-12. Brake fluid

S11AO

& Checking the fluid level

S11AO01

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission fluid

499

Maintenance and service

(502,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the

reservoir monthly on the even surface.

1 “MAX” level line

2 “MIN” level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from

the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level

is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-

er.

& Recommended brake fluid

S11AO02

Refer to “Fluids” �P529.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

11-13. Brake pedal

S11AR

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

Brake pedal

500

(503,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-14. Replacement of brake

pad

S11AT

The disc brakes have audible wear in-

dicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads

S11AT01

When replacing the brake pad, use only

genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-

ment, the new parts must be broken in.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

11-15. Tires and wheels

S11AV

& Types of tires

S11AV01

You should be familiar with the type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

S11AV0101

All season tires are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road

conditions. However, all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

S11AV0102

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on

slippery roads such as on snow-covered or

icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of brake pad

501

Maintenance and service

(504,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Winter (snow) tires

S11AV0103

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However,

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

S11AV02

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not

react immediately to a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a blow-out caused

by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on

the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-

cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9

kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for every difference of

108F (5.68C) between the temperature in

the garage and the temperature outside.

By way of example, the following table

shows the required tire pressures that

correspond to various outside tempera-

tures when the temperature in the garage

is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: 245/50R20 102H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5)

108F (−128C) 38 (265, 2.65)

−108F (−238C)

41 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not turn off,

the tire pressure monitoring system may

not be functioning normally. In this event,

go to a SUBARU dealer to have the

system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by an

increase in the outside air temperature or

by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to turn off.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

on the combination meter will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately 1

minute.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned on or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately 1 minute, you

should have your tire pressure mon-

Tires and wheels

502

(505,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

itoring system checked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise, an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately 1 minute. This indicates the

TPMS is unable to monitor all four

road wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for tire

and sensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately 1 minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system

inspected.

! TPMS valve self-registration

S11AV0201

When the wheels are replaced (such as

when installing snow tires) or when a new

TPMS valve is mounted on a new installed

wheel, you will need to perform TPMS

valve self-registration. Refer to the follow-

ing procedure to perform TPMS valve self-

registration.

1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on

the vehicle.

2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified

value. For information about the spe-

cified value of the tire pressure, refer to

“Tires” �P530.

3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40

km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

NOTE

. When installing TPMS valves, use

only genuine SUBARU parts.

. Registration of TPMS valves can

also be done at a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

& Tire inspection

S11AV03

Check on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer im-

mediately if you find any problems.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires

strike curbs or are subjected

to harsh treatment as when the

vehicle is driven on a rough

surface, they can suffer da-

mage that cannot be seen with

the naked eye. This type of

damage does not become evi-

dent until time has passed. Try

not to drive over curbs, pot-

holes or on other rough sur-

faces. If doing so is unavoid-

able, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less,

and approach the curbs as

squarely as possible. Also,

make sure the tires are not

pressed against the curb when

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels

503

Maintenance and service

(506,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

you park the vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration

while driving or find it difficult

to steer the vehicle in a

straight line, one of the tires

and/or wheels may be da-

maged. Drive slowly to the

nearest authorized SUBARU

dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

S11AV04

Maintaining the correct tire pres-

sures helps to maximize the tires’

service lives and is essential for

good running performance. Check

and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire and the spare (if

equipped) at least once a month

and before any long journey.

Tire inflation pressure label

Check the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Use a pressure

gauge to adjust the tire pressures

to the values shown on the tire

inflation pressure label. The tire

inflation pressure label is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Driving even a short distance

warms up the tires and increases

the tire pressures. Also, the tire

pressures are affected by the out-

side temperature. It is best to check

tire pressure outdoors before driv-

ing the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air

inside it expands, causing the tire

pressure to increase. Be careful not

to mistakenly release air from a

warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire

increases by approximately

4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

)

when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold

when the vehicle has been

parked for at least three hours

or has been driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires

to adjust pressure. Doing so

will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from

controllability and ride comfort, and

they cause the tires to wear abnor-

mally.

Tires and wheels

504

(507,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Correct tire pressure (tread

worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and

steering is responsive. Rolling

resistance is low, so fuel con-

sumption is also lower.

2 Under inflated tire (tread worn

on shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so

fuel consumption is also high-

er.

3 Over inflated (tread worn in the

center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the

tire magnifies the effects of

road-surface bumps and dips,

possibly resulting in vehicle

damage.

If the tire inflation pressure label

shows tire pressures for the vehicle

when fully loaded, adjust the tire

pressures to the values that match

the loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with

excessively low tire pressures

can cause the tires to deform

severely and to rapidly heat

up. A sharp increase in tem-

perature could cause tread

separation and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to

an accident.

& Wheel balance

S11AV05

Each wheel was correctly balanced

when your vehicle was new, but the

wheels will become unbalanced as

the tires become worn during use.

Wheel imbalance causes the steer-

ing wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts

from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-

bility. It can also cause steering and

suspension system problems and

abnormal tire wear. If you suspect

that the wheels are not correctly

balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire

repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel align-

ment causes the tires to wear

on one side and reduces the

vehicle’s running stability.

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels

505

Maintenance and service

(508,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Contact your SUBARU dealer

if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is de-

signed to hold each wheel at a

certain alignment (relative to the

other wheels and to the road) for

optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

& Wear indicators

S11AV06

1 New tread

2 Worn tread

3 Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear

indicator, which becomes visible

when the depth of the tread grooves

decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A

tire must be replaced when the

tread wear indicator appears as a

solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indi-

cator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptable

limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at high

speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. The resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread

regularly and replace the tires

before their tread wear indicators

become visible.

Tires and wheels

506

(509,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Rotational direction of tires

S11AV11

Example of rotational direction

marked on the sidewall

1 Front

If the tires have specific rotational

direction, refer to the arrow marked

on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing for-

ward direction when the wheels are

fitted.

& Tire rotation

S11AV07

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-

unidirectional tires

1 Front

Vehicles equipped with unidi-

rectional tires

1 Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to

wheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration each

time they are rotated. For the tire

rotation schedule, refer to the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly

worn tires at the time of rotation.

After tire rotation, adjust the tire

pressures and make sure the wheel

nuts are correctly tightened.

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels

507

Maintenance and service

(510,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

After driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km), check the wheel

nuts again and retighten any nut

that has become loose.

For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy

wheels” �P509.

& Tire replacement

S11AV08

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires

fitted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristics of the

vehicle and were selected to give the best

possible combination of running perfor-

mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is

essential for every tire to have a size and

construction matching those shown on the

tire inflation pressure label and to have a

speed symbol and load index matching

those shown on the tire inflation pressure

label.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing

tire(s), all four tires must be the

same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Speed symbol

(d) Circumference

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degree of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire inflation pres-

sure label. The tire inflation pres-

sure label is located on the dri-

ver’s door pillar.

If all the four tires are not the

same for items (a) to (h), serious

mechanical damage could be

caused to the drivetrain of the

car, and affect the followings.

– Ride

– Handling

– Braking

– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration

– Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

S11AV09

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

at your SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

508

(511,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or for any

other reason, always check the tight-

ness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

11-16. Alloy wheels

S11BM

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-

maged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to

change a flat tire, always check the

tightness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap are replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU

parts designed for alloy wheels.

. When stacking and storing removed

tires, place shock-absorbing material

between the tires to protect the wheels

from becoming scratched.

11-17. Windshield washer

fluid

S11AX

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid remaining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will illuminate.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid.

– CONTINUED –

Alloy wheels

509

Maintenance and service

(512,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Adding the windshield

washer fluid

S11AX01

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add windshield washer fluid.

& Windshield washer fluid

S11AX02

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable, use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, use

an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

11-18. Replacement of wiper

blades

S11AZ

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer

surface of the windshield and rear window

using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral

detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not,

however, use detergent to clean the blade

rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth

(and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive

cleaner) when you clean the blade rub-

bers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade

strongly, the black coating component will

peel off, which will cause the wiper to

judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that

the rubber has not come loose. After

cleaning the window glass and wiper blade

rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean

water. Rinse the window until the water

does not form beads on the glass. This

indicates that the glass is clean.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

Replacement of wiper blades

510

(513,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

. When returning the raised wiper

arms to the original positions,

carefully return the wiper arms

on the windshield by hand. You

should not return the wiper arms

to the windshield only by the

return spring. Otherwise, the wi-

per arms may be deformed and/or

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

S11AZ01

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing

the wiper blade. Holding the wiper

blade, may result in blade deforma-

tion.

1 Lock knob

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by

hand, push the lock knob to release the

lock, and then pull out the wiper blade

assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the

lock knob. The lock knob may be

scratched.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of wiper blades

511

Maintenance and service

(514,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm

connection part and then slide it in the

opposite direction of removal to install.

After installing the wiper blade assem-

bly, check that the connection part is

locked completely.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Window wiper blade rubber

S11AZ05

Replace the wiper blade rubber according

to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit

on the underside of the wiper blade is

in the removal position, as shown in the

illustration, so that it can be removed.

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.

3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,

perform the removal procedure in the

reverse order. After installation, check

that the tip of the wiper rubber has

reached the end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper

blade rubber replacement. We recom-

mend that you contact your SUBARU

dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-

ment if necessary.

Replacement of wiper blades

512

(515,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Rear window wiper blade as-

sembly

S11AZ03

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in

place.

5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Rear window wiper blade

rubber

S11AZ04

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to unlock it from the plastic

support.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of wiper blades

513

Maintenance and service

(516,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1 Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the

metal spines from the old blade rubber

and install them in the new blade

rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

ends. If the rubber is not retained

properly, the wiper may scratch the rear

window glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in

place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Replacement of wiper blades

514

(517,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-19. Battery

S11BA

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer.

Wash hands after handling

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

NOTE

To avoid battery drain, do not use

electric power (e.g., lights, wipers,

climate control, seat heaters, etc.) for

longer than necessary when the engine

is off. If using the radio, room lights or

other electrical equipment with the

engine off, even in the ignition switch

is in the “ACC” position, the battery will

drain.

Battery

515

Maintenance and service

(518,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

11-20. Fuses

S11BB

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher rating or with material other

than a fuse because serious damage

or a fire could result.

NOTE

Fuse rating and using circuit are de-

scribed on each behind the fuse box

cover.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1 Spare fuses

2 Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in

the engine compartment. Also, the spare

fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse

box cover.

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller

when removing it from the main fuse box.

1 Good

2 Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the corre-

sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover.

Fuses

516

(519,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this

indicates that its system has a pro-

blem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

repairs.

11-21. Installation of acces-

sories

S11BD

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

11-22. Replacing bulbs

S11BE

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

chart” �P532.

– CONTINUED –

Installation of accessories

517

Maintenance and service

(520,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Headlights

S11BE18

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

& Front turn signal light

S11BE03

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove it.

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To

make it easy to access the bulb, turn

the neck of the washer fluid filler pipe

as illustrated.

Replacing bulbs

518

(521,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

3. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclock-

wise.

4. Replace the bulb with a new one. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it

clicks.

6. Install the air intake duct with clips

(right-hand side).

7. Set the washer tank to the original

place and secure it with a clip (left-

hand side).

& Rear combination lights

S11BE05

1. Remove the covers.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws that

secure the rear combination light as-

sembly.

3. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly rearward and remove it from

the vehicle.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing bulbs

519

Maintenance and service

(522,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Backup light

2 Rear side marker light

3 Rear turn signal light

5. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning

it counterclockwise.

6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

7. Set the bulb socket into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

8. Reconnect the electrical connector.

1 Guide pins

2 Catches

3 Clips

9. Put the rear combination light assem-

bly into place while aligning the guide

pins and catches with the guide holes

and clips on the vehicle.

10. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

11. Reinstall the covers.

Replacing bulbs

520

(523,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& License plate light

S11BE07

1. The license plate lights must be

pushed inside, and then pulled out to

be removed.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the

license plate light cover.

& Other bulbs

S11BE29

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

11-23. Replacing key battery

S11BK

The access key fob/transmitter battery

may be discharged under the following

conditions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable.

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable.

. The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard

distance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

& Safety precautions

S11BK04

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/transmit-

ter when replacing the battery.

. Before replacing the battery, re-

move any static electricity.

. Be careful not to touch or damage

the printed circuit board in the

access key fob/transmitter when

replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

– CONTINUED –

Replacing key battery

521

Maintenance and service

(524,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Batteries should not be exposed

to excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals.

It may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the transmitter functions prop-

erly.

& Replacing battery of access

key fob

S11BK01

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

access key fob cover, make sure that

the plastic part does not come off or

become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or

equivalent

1 Release button

2 Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap

to remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

Replacing key battery

522

(525,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the

figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

& Replacing battery of trans-

mitter

S11BK02

CAUTION

Before replacing the battery, remove

any static electricity.

Battery: Button battery CR2025 or

equivalent

1. Open the key head using a flat-head

screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing key battery

523

Maintenance and service

(526,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1 Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery (type CR2025 or equivalent)

making sure to install the new battery

with the negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

remote keyless entry system’s control

unit. Press either the “

” or “ ” button

six times to synchronize the unit.

Replacing key battery

524

(527,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S12

12-1. Specifications ............................................... 526

Dimensions ........................................................ 526

Engine................................................................ 526

Fuel....................................................................527

Engine oil........................................................... 527

Front differential and rear differential gear oil .....529

Fluids ................................................................. 529

Engine coolant ...................................................530

Electrical system ................................................530

Tires .................................................................. 530

Temporary spare tires ........................................ 531

Brake pedal........................................................ 531

Brake disc ......................................................... 531

Brake pad .......................................................... 531

12-2. Bulb chart ......................................................532

Safety precautions ............................................. 532

Bulb chart.......................................................... 533

12-3. Vehicle identification.....................................535

Specifications

(528,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

12-1. Specifications

S12AA

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

S12AA01

in (mm)

Item

Overall length 196.8 (4,998)

Overall width 76.0 (1,930)

Overall height 71.6 (1,819)

Wheel base 113.8 (2,890)

Tread

Front 64.4 (1,635)

Rear 64.2 (1,630)

Ground clearance*

8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

& Engine

S12AA02

Engine model FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 146 (2,387)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0)

Compression ratio 10.6 : 1

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

Specifications

526

(529,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Fuel

S12AA08

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “

Fuel” �P341.

& Engine oil

S12AA12

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” �P492.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended

that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

S12AA1201

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

527

Specifications

(530,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Alternative engine oil

S12AA1202

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the

temperature and other factors.

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SP with the

words “RESOURCE CONSER-

VING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-6A, which can be iden-

tified with the ILSAC certification

mark (Starburst mark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and

protection. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 conventional oil may be used

if replenishment is needed but should

be changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at

the next oil change.

– Adding the oil from low level to

full level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

Specifications

528

(531,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Front differential and rear differential gear oil

S12AA13

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)

Oil capacity*

1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” �P499

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.

& Fluids

S12AA10

Fluid Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable

transmission fluid

Consult your SUBARU dealer.

Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid

cooler: 12.7 US qt (12.0 liters, 10.6 Imp qt)*

Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid

cooler: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)*

“Continuously variable

transmission fluid” �P499

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3

or DOT 4 brake fluid

—

“

Brake fluid” �P499

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*4: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to

“

Vehicle identification” �P535.)

*5: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to

“

Vehicle identification” �P535.)

– CONTINUED –

Specifications

529

Specifications

(532,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Engine coolant

S12AA11

Coolant capacity Coolant type

11.7 US qt (11.1 liters, 9.8 Imp qt)

SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “

Cooling system” �P495.

& Electrical system

S12AA03

Battery type LN2

Alternator 12 V - 190 A

Spark plugs

SILKFR8A6 (NGK)

& Tires

S12AA05

Tire size 245/60R18 105H 245/50R20 102H

Wheel size 18 6 7 1/2J 20 6 7 1/2J

Pressure

Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts

by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,

refer to “

Changing a flat tire” �P458.

Specifications

530

(533,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Temporary spare tires

S12AA15

Temporary spare tire size T165/90 D18

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

& Brake pedal

S12AA27

in (mm)

Pedal clearance 2.68 (68)*

Pedal free play

0.02 - 0.07 (0.4 - 1.8)

*1: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

& Brake disc

S12AA18

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your

SUBARU dealer.

& Brake pad

S12AA28

in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit

Front 0.063 (1.6)

Rear

0.059 (1.5)

Specifications

531

Specifications

(534,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

12-2. Bulb chart

S12AC

& Safety precautions

S12AC03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

Bulb chart

532

(535,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Bulb chart

S12AC04

NOTE

Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

– CONTINUED –

Bulb chart

533

Specifications

(536,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Wattage Bulb No.

1 Front turn signal light 12 V-28 W 7444NA

2 Vanity mirror light 14 V-1.4 W —

3 Reading light (if equipped) 12 V-8 W —

4 Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W

5 Rear side marker light 12 V-5 W W5W

6 Door step light (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W

7 Backup light 12 V-16 W W16W

8 License plate light 12 V-5 W W5W

9 Cargo area light 12 V-5 W W5W

A Low/High beam headlight

Daytime running light

— —

B Map lights — —

C Side turn signal light (if equipped) — —

D High-mounted stop light — —

E Stop light/Tail light — —

F Front side marker light — —

G Front position light — —

H Front fog light (if equipped) — —

Bulb chart

534

(537,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

12-3. Vehicle identification

S12AD

1 Emission control label

2 Tire inflation pressure label (Vehicle

placard)

3 Certification label

4 Vehicle identification number plate

5 Model number label

6 Fuel label

7 Air conditioner label

Vehicle identification

535

Specifications

(538,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(539,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S13

13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 538

13-2. Tire information ............................................ 538

Tire labeling .......................................................538

Recommended tire inflation pressure..................540

Glossary of tire terminology ...............................542

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 546

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities ................................................. 546

Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires.............. 546

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 547

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine .........547

Calculating total and load capacities varying

seating configurations...................................... 548

13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .......550

TREADWEAR ..................................................... 551

TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 551

TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 551

13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.).................552

13-6. How to contact Transport Canada

in order to report a safety concern

relating to the vehicle (Canada)...................552

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(540,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

13-1. For U.S.A.

S13AA

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

13-2. Tire information

S13AB

& Tire labeling

S13AB01

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These markings

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

S13AB0101

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing system in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

S13AB010101

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as

passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating

Descriptions

S13AB010102

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

For U.S.A.

538

(541,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum

load a tire can carry at the

speed indicated by its speed

symbol, at maximum inflation

pressure.

For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs

(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580

kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s cap-

ability to travel at established

and predetermined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their original condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

S13AB0102

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

Type A

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(3) Tire Size Code

(4) Tire Type Code

(5) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

539

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(542,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Type B

(1) DOT symbol*

(2) Plant Code

(3) Manufacturer’s Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Fed-

eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

! Other markings

S13AB0103

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

S13AB010301

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

! Maximum load rating

S13AB010302

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg

(1,279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

S13AB010303

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

S13AB010304

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-

WALL 2 POLYESTER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-

ing (UTQG)

S13AB010305

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards” �P550.

& Recommended tire inflation

pressure

S13AB02

! Recommended cold tire in-

flation pressure

S13AB0201

For recommended cold tire inflation

pressure for your vehicle’s tires,

refer to “

Tires” �P530.

Tire information

540

(543,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

! Vehicle placard

S13AB0202

The vehicle placard is attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loaded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety conse-

quences of under-inflation

S13AB0203

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper

inflation

S13AB0204

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a short

distance warms up the tires and

increases the tire pressures. Also,

the tire pressures are affected by

the outside temperature. It is best to

check tire pressure outdoors before

driving the vehicle. When a tire

becomes warm, the air inside it

expands, causing the tire pressure

to increase. Be careful not to mis-

takenly release air from a warm tire

to reduce its pressure.

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

541

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(544,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Glossary of tire terminology

S13AB03

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white letter-

ing or bears manufacturer,

brand, and/or model name

molding that is higher or

deeper than the same mold-

ing on the other sidewall of

the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that

has a particular side that

Tire information

542

(545,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

must always face outward

when mounting on a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

543

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(546,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or pro-

tective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound

from the cord material in the side-

wall.

. Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index

equal to or greater than 110, com-

pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan-

dard Reference Test Tire, when

using the snow traction test as

described in ASTM F-1805-00,

Standard Test Method for Single

Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight

Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered

Surfaces, and which is marked with

an Alpine Symbol “

” on at least

one sidewall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

Tire information

544

(547,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section) and

dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

– CONTINUED –

Tire information

545

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(548,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

S13AB04

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious da-

mage, nails, and stones. At the

same time, check the tires for

abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become

visible. When a tire’s tread wear

indicator becomes visible, the

tire is worn beyond the accepta-

ble limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this

condition, driving at even low

speeds in wet weather can cause

the vehicle to hydroplane. Possi-

ble resulting loss of vehicle con-

trol can lead to an accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 6,000 miles (10,000

km). For information about the

tire rotation order, refer to “

Tire

rotation” �P507.

Replace any

damaged or unevenly worn tires

at the time of rotation. After tire

rotation, adjust the tire pressures

and make sure the wheel nuts

are correctly tightened. For in-

formation about the tightening

torque and tightening sequence

for the wheel nuts, refer to “

Flat

tires” �P458.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

S13AB06

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’s maximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door

pillar.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on

tires

S13AB07

Overloading could affect vehicle

handling, stopping distance, and

vehicle and tire performance in the

following ways. This could lead to

an accident and possibly result in

severe personal injury.

Tire information

546

(549,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other body parts could break or

experience accelerated wear

that will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

S13AB08

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6

150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle.

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how

to determine

S13BU

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

door pillar. Locate the statement

“The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your

vehicle’s placard.

The vehicle placard also shows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle load limit – how to determine

547

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(550,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

of optional equipment + tongue load

of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-

ing, refer to “

Loading your vehicle”

�P433.

& Calculating total and load

capacities varying seating

configurations

S13BU01

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the following

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 900 lbs or

408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo

can be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to two), the calculations

are as follows.

Vehicle load limit – how to determine

548

(551,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or

more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 408 kg or

900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer

weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of

the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo

can be carried.

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle load limit – how to determine

549

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(552,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or

more.

13-4. Uniform tire quality

grading standards

S13AC

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in the area of treadwear,

traction, and temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

Uniform tire quality grading standards

550

(553,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& TREADWEAR

S13AC02

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& TRACTION AA, A, B, C

S13AC03

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteris-

tics.

& TEMPERATURE A, B, C

S13AC04

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level

of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the la-

boratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

Uniform tire quality grading standards

551

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

(554,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

13-5. Reporting safety de-

fects (U.S.A.)

S13AH

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer,

or Subaru of America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,

Washington, DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

13-6. How to contact Trans-

port Canada in order to report

a safety concern relating to

the vehicle (Canada)

S13CF

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

552

(555,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(556,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(557,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

S14

Index

(558,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P369

Warning light ............................................ P182, P370

Access key fob ....................................................... P119

Warning light ..................................................... P188

Accessories .......................................................... P517

Accessory power outlet .......................................... P314

Activation of valet mode ......................................... P233

Air cleaner element ................................................ P497

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control.................................... P288

Automatic climate control system......................... P289

Manual climate control........................................ P290

Air filtration system ................................................ P298

Airflow mode ......................................................... P290

Airflow selection

Automatic climate control system......................... P289

Alarm system ........................................................ P144

All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P185

Antenna................................................................ P302

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P369

Arming the system ................................................. P144

Ashtray................................................................. P318

Assist grip............................................................. P319

AT OIL TEMP warning light ..................................... P180

Audio set .............................................................. P302

Auto dimmer cancel function ................................... P174

Auto on/off headlights............................................. P234

Sensor ............................................................. P236

Auto Vehicle Hold function ...................................... P380

ON indicator light ............................................... P185

Auto-dimming mirror/compass.................................. P250

Automatic climate control system ............................. P289

Automatic headlight beam leveler

Warning light ..................................................... P193

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P54

Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers.................. P246

Battery .................................................................. P515

Drainage prevention function ............................... P143

Jump starting..................................................... P463

Replacement (access key fob)............................. P522

Replacement (remote keyless entry system) ......... P138

Replacement (transmitter) ................................... P523

Vehicle battery ................................................... P515

Bench seat .............................................................. P39

Booster cushion ....................................................... P77

Booster seat ............................................................ P77

Brake

Assist ............................................................... P368

Disc.................................................................. P531

Fluid ....................................................... P499, P529

Parking ............................................................. P378

Pedal................................................................ P500

System ............................................................. P368

Brake system......................................................... P368

Warning light ..................................................... P183

Braking ................................................................. P367

Tips .................................................................. P367

Breaking-in of new brake pads................................. P501

Index

556

(559,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

BSD/RCTA............................................................ P386

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P390

OFF indicator ........................................... P194, P392

Warning indicator...................................... P194, P392

Warning volume................................................. P391

Bulb

Chart................................................................ P532

Replacement..................................................... P517

Cabin connect .............................................. P210, P306

Captain seat............................................................ P39

Cargo area

Cover ............................................................... P321

Light................................................................. P307

Tie-down hooks ................................................. P323

Catalytic converter ................................................. P423

Center console ...................................................... P312

Changing

Coolant............................................................. P496

Flat tire............................................................. P458

Oil and oil filter .................................................. P494

Charge warning light .............................................. P179

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light................................................................... P178

Checking

Coolant level ..................................................... P495

Fluid level (brake fluid) ....................................... P499

Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P509

Oil level (engine oil) ........................................... P492

Child restraint systems .............................................. P67

Installation of a booster cushion............................ P77

Installation of a booster seat................................. P77

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P72

Lower and top tether anchorages.......................... P78

Top tether anchorages ......................................... P83

Child safety

Locks................................................................ P147

Chime

Key .................................................................. P167

Light ................................................................. P234

Seatbelt .................................................... P55, P175

Cigarette lighter...................................................... P315

Cleaning

Alloy wheels ...................................................... P480

Interior .............................................................. P481

Ventilation grille.................................................. P297

Climate control system .................................. P283, P289

Automatic................................................ P288, P289

Manual ............................................................. P290

Clock .................................................................... P231

Coat hook.............................................................. P320

Combination meter display (color LCD) ..................... P196

Compass............................................................... P250

Console................................................................. P312

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ................. P361

Fluid ................................................................. P499

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P180

Cooling system ...................................................... P495

Corrosion protection................................................ P480

Index

557

Index

(560,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Daytime running light system .................................. P240

Deactivation of valet mode...................................... P233

Defogger .............................................................. P276

Defrosting ............................................................. P296

Deicer .................................................................. P276

Differential gear oil

Front ....................................................... P499, P529

Rear........................................................ P499, P529

Dimensions ........................................................... P526

Disarming the alarm system.................................... P145

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ................... P369

Door

Locks ............................................................... P139

Open warning light............................................. P185

Double trip meter ................................................... P171

Drive belts ............................................................ P498

DriverFocus .......................................................... P407

Driver Monitoring System

OFF indicator light ............................................. P195

Operation indicator light...................................... P195

Temporary stop indicator light.............................. P196

Warning light ..................................................... P195

Driving

AWD vehicles.................................................... P425

Foreign countries............................................... P424

Off road............................................................ P426

Snowy and icy roads.......................................... P430

Tips................................................ P366, P422, P425

Winter .............................................................. P428

ECO gauge ........................................................... P173

Electrical system .................................................... P530

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ..................................................... P183, P370

Warning ............................................................ P183

Electronic parking brake .......................................... P378

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P380

Indicator light..................................................... P183

Warning ............................................................ P383

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)........................... P54

Engine

Compartment overview ....................................... P491

Coolant ................................................... P495, P530

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)........................... P422

Hood ................................................................ P489

Low oil level warning light ................................... P180

Oil .......................................................... P492, P527

Overheating....................................................... P465

Starting & stopping................................... P348, P350

Exterior care .......................................................... P478

Flat tires................................................................ P458

Floor mat............................................................... P319

Fluid

Fluid level ......................................................... P529

Fluid level

Brake................................................................ P499

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ............. P499

Index

558

(561,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Fog light ............................................................... P242

Indicator light..................................................... P194

Switch .............................................................. P242

Folding mirror switch .............................................. P275

Front

Differential gear oil.................................... P499, P529

Seatbelt pretensioners.......................................... P63

Turn signal light ................................................. P518

Front seat

Forward and backward adjustment ........................ P33

Manual seat ........................................................ P33

Memory function .................................................. P35

Power seat.......................................................... P34

Reclining the seatback ......................................... P33

Seat heater ......................................................... P51

Seat height adjustment......................................... P34

Front seat heater ................................................... P295

Fuel ............................................................ P341, P527

Consumption indicator........................................ P201

Economy hints................................................... P422

Filler lid and cap ................................................ P342

Gauge .............................................................. P172

Requirements........................................... P341, P527

Fuses ................................................................... P516

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).......................... P434

Glove box .............................................................. P311

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)...................... P434

Hazard warning flasher ................................. P170, P452

Headlight..................................................... P234, P518

Beam leveler ..................................................... P242

Bulb replacing.................................................... P518

Bulb wattage ..................................................... P532

Control switch.................................................... P234

Flasher ............................................................. P237

Indicator light..................................................... P194

Welcome lighting function.................................... P235

Heater

Front seat ......................................................... P295

High beam assist.................................................... P237

Indicator light..................................................... P193

High beam assist function ....................................... P237

High beam indicator light......................................... P193

High/low beam change (dimmer) .............................. P237

Hill descent control ....................................... P373, P376

Indicator............................................................ P194

Hill start assist ....................................................... P384

HomeLink

............................................................. P250

Hook

Cargo tie-down .................................................. P323

Coat ................................................................. P320

Shopping bag .................................................... P321

Towing and tie-down........................................... P466

Horn ..................................................................... P279

Hose and connections............................................. P495

Index

559

Index

(562,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Icy road surface warning indicator............................ P195

Ignition switch ....................................................... P166

Light................................................................. P167

Illumination brightness control ................................. P173

Immobilizer ........................................................... P134

Indicator light (security indicator light).......... P134, P192

Indicator light

Auto Vehicle Hold .............................................. P185

BSD/RCTA OFF ....................................... P194, P392

BSD/RCTA warning................................... P194, P392

Driver Monitoring System operation ..................... P195

Electronic parking brake ..................................... P183

Front fog light .................................................... P194

Headlight .......................................................... P194

High beam ........................................................ P193

High beam assist ............................................... P193

Hill descent control ............................................ P194

Immobilizer ....................................................... P134

Security ................................................... P134, P192

Select lever/Gear position ................................... P193

Sonar Audible Alarm OFF................................... P196

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF .................... P193

Turn signal........................................................ P193

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF............................ P187

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation............ P186, P187

X-MODE........................................................... P194

Indicator/Indicator light

High Beam Assist .............................................. P237

Inside mirror.......................................................... P250

Interior lights ......................................................... P306

Jack-up point ......................................................... P458

Jump starting ......................................................... P463

Key....................................................................... P118

Number plate..................................................... P118

Reminder chime................................................. P167

Replacement ..................................................... P134

Keyless access with push-button start system ........... P119

Disabling keyless access functions....................... P129

Warning chimes and warning light.............. P132, P188

When access key does not operate

properly .............................. P132, P170, P352, P470

Keyless entry system .............................................. P135

Keyless entry system (models without push-button

start system)....................................................... P135

Lap belt pretensioner ................................................ P64

Leather seat materials............................................. P482

License plate light .................................................. P521

Light

Backup ............................................................. P519

Cargo area........................................................ P307

Control switch.................................................... P234

Daytime running................................................. P240

Front fog ........................................................... P242

Front side marker............................................... P234

Front turn signal light.......................................... P518

Ignition switch.................................................... P167

Index

560

(563,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

License plate..................................................... P521

Map ................................................................. P306

Rear combination............................................... P519

Reading............................................................ P307

Rear side marker light ........................................ P519

Stop ................................................................. P519

Tail................................................................... P519

Turn signal...................................... P243, P518, P519

Vanity mirror...................................................... P310

Loading your vehicle .............................................. P433

Low fuel warning light............................................. P185

Low tire pressure warning light ................................ P181

Lower and top tether anchorage ................................ P78

Maintenance

Precautions....................................................... P487

Schedule .......................................................... P487

Seatbelt .............................................................. P61

Tools ................................................................ P452

Manual mode ........................................................ P363

Map light .............................................................. P306

Maximum load limits............................................... P441

Meters and gauges ................................................ P170

Mirror defogger...................................................... P276

Mirrors.................................................................. P250

Moonroof ..................................................... P159, P474

New vehicle break-in driving ................................... P422

Odometer .............................................................. P171

Off road driving ...................................................... P426

Oil filter ................................................................. P494

Oil level

Engine .............................................................. P492

Front differential gear ......................................... P499

Rear differential gear .......................................... P499

Warning light ..................................................... P180

Oil pressure warning light ........................................ P179

One-touch Interior Illumination function ..................... P308

One-touch lane changer .......................................... P244

Outside

Mirror defogger .................................................. P276

Mirrors .................................................... P273, P276

Overheating engine ................................................ P465

Parking ................................................................. P378

Brake................................................................ P378

Tips .................................................................. P383

Passenger seatbelt reminder ................................... P175

Periodic inspections................................................ P424

Petrol fuel.............................................................. P341

PIN Code Access ................................................... P126

Power

Outlets.............................................................. P314

Outside mirrors ........................................ P273, P276

Rear gate.......................................................... P151

Seat .................................................................. P34

Steering ............................................................ P366

Index

561

Index

(564,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Steering warning light......................................... P185

Windows........................................................... P147

Power rear gate..................................................... P151

Precautions against vehicle modification............ P66, P114

Preparing to drive .................................................. P347

Push-button

Ignition switch .......................................... P166, P168

Starting and stopping engine...................... P348, P350

RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)

OFF indicator .................................................... P195

Warning indicator...................................... P195, P406

RCTA ................................................................... P388

Rear

Combination lights ............................................. P519

Differential gear oil.................................... P499, P529

Gate........................................................ P150, P472

Turn signal light ................................................. P519

Rear door window sunshade ................................... P161

Rear seat reminder .................................................. P67

Rear view camera.................................................. P332

Rear window

Defogger .......................................................... P276

Wiper and washer switch.................................... P249

Wiper blades..................................................... P513

Recommended

Brake fluid ............................................... P500, P529

Continuously variable transmission fluid ............... P529

Engine oil ................................................ P494, P527

Front differential gear oil ..................................... P529

Rear differential gear oil...................................... P529

Spark plugs ............................................. P498, P530

Refueling............................................................... P342

Remote engine start system .................................... P353

Remote keyless entry system .................................. P135

Remote keyless entry system (models without

push-button start system) ..................................... P135

Replacement

Access key fob battery........................................ P522

Air cleaner element ............................................ P497

Brake pad ......................................................... P501

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .............. P523

Wiper blades ..................................................... P510

Replacing

Battery (remote keyless entry system) .................. P138

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)..... P138

Replacing bulbs ..................................................... P517

Backup light ...................................................... P519

Front position light.............................................. P518

Front turn signal light.......................................... P518

License plate light .............................................. P521

Rear combination light ........................................ P519

Rear side marker light ........................................ P519

Rear turn signal light .......................................... P519

Stop light........................................................... P519

Tail light ............................................................ P519

Reverse Automatic Braking system .......................... P395

Rocking the vehicle ................................................ P432

Roof rails............................................................... P435

Roof tent ............................................................... P435

Index

562

(565,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Seat

Fabric............................................................... P481

Heater ................................................................ P50

Seatbelt .................................................................. P52

Extender............................................................. P61

Fastening............................................................ P55

Maintenance ....................................................... P61

Pretensioners ...................................................... P63

Safety tips........................................................... P52

Warning light and chime .............................. P55, P175

Second-row seat...................................................... P39

Armrest .............................................................. P42

Folding down the seatback ................................... P41

Forward and backward adjustment ........................ P40

Reclining the seatback ......................................... P40

Seat heater ......................................................... P51

Security

Alarm system .................................................... P144

Immobilizer ....................................................... P134

Indicator light............................................ P134, P192

Select lever

Position indicator ............................................... P193

Shift lock function .............................................. P365

Shopping bag hook................................................ P321

Shoulder pretensioners............................................. P65

Smart Rearview Mirror............................................ P258

Snow tires.................................................... P431, P502

Snowy and icy roads.............................................. P430

Sounding a panic alarm.......................................... P137

Spare tire .............................................................. P453

Spark plugs ................................................. P498, P530

Specifications......................................................... P526

Speedometer ......................................................... P170

SRS

Curtain airbag.................................................... P105

Frontal airbag ..................................................... P94

Side airbag........................................................ P105

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) .... P85

SRS airbag system

Monitors............................................................ P112

Servicing........................................................... P113

Warning light ..................................................... P177

Starting & stopping engine............................. P348, P350

State emission testing (U.S. only)............................. P346

Steering lock................................................ P349, P353

Steering Responsive Headlight ................................ P241

Steering wheel

Heater .............................................................. P278

Lock ....................................................... P349, P353

Power ............................................................... P366

Tilt/telescopic..................................................... P277

Stop light..................................................... P519, P533

Storage compartment.............................................. P311

Sun visors ............................................................. P309

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........................ P85

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) .............. P85

Surround View Monitor............................................ P324

Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P482

Index

563

Index

(566,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Tachometer ........................................................... P170

Temperature gauge ................................................ P172

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P180

Rear differential oil............................................. P180

Temporary spare tire ..................................... P457, P531

Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P78, P83

Third-row seat ......................................................... P43

Tie-down hooks/holes............................................. P466

Tire ............................................................. P501, P530

Chains.............................................................. P432

Inspection ......................................................... P503

Pressures and wear ........................................... P504

Replacement..................................................... P508

Rotation............................................................ P507

Size and pressure.............................................. P530

Types ............................................................... P501

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS)................................... P181, P377, P461, P502

Warning light ..................................................... P181

Tires and wheels ................................................... P501

Tools .................................................................... P452

Top tether anchorages....................................... P78, P83

Towing.................................................................. P466

All wheels on the ground .................................... P469

Flat-bed truck .................................................... P468

Hooks............................................................... P466

Weight.............................................................. P441

Trailer

Connecting ....................................................... P438

Hitch....................................................... P437, P444

Towing tips ........................................................ P446

Trailer towing ......................................................... P441

Trip meter.............................................................. P171

Turn signal

Indicator lights ................................................... P193

Lever ................................................................ P243

Under-floor storage compartment ............................. P324

USB power supply .................................................. P316

Valet mode .................................................. P146, P233

Vanity mirror .......................................................... P310

Vehicle

Capacity weight ................................................. P433

Identification ...................................................... P535

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light.............................................. P187

Operation indicator light ............................ P186, P187

System ............................................................. P371

Warning light ..................................................... P186

Ventilator ............................................................... P282

Warning and indicator lights..................................... P174

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P188

Seatbelt .................................................... P55, P175

Index

564

(567,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

Warning indicator

BSD/RCTA........................................................ P194

Icy road surface................................................. P195

RAB ........................................................ P195, P406

Warning light

ABS ........................................................ P182, P370

Access key fob .................................................. P188

All-Wheel Drive.................................................. P185

AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P180

Automatic headlight beam leveler ........................ P193

Brake system .................................................... P183

Charge ............................................................. P179

CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P178

Door open......................................................... P185

Driver Monitoring System.................................... P195

Engine low oil level ............................................ P180

Keyless access with push-button start system....... P188

LED headlight ................................................... P193

Low fuel............................................................ P185

Low tire pressure ............................................... P181

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning

light)............................................................... P178

Oil pressure ...................................................... P179

Power steering .................................................. P185

Rear differential oil temperature........................... P180

Seatbelt ..................................................... P55, P175

SRS airbag system ............................................ P177

Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P193

Vehicle Dynamics Control .......................... P186, P187

Windshield washer fluid...................................... P180

Warranties and maintenance ................................... P441

Washing ................................................................ P478

Waxing and polishing .............................................. P479

Wear indicators ...................................................... P506

Welcome lighting function........................................ P235

Wheel

Alloy ................................................................. P509

Balance ............................................................ P505

Nut tightening torque ................................ P458, P531

Replacement ..................................................... P508

Windows ............................................................... P147

Windshield

Washer fluid ...................................................... P509

Wiper and washer switches ................................. P246

Wiper blades ..................................................... P511

Wiper deicer ...................................................... P276

Winter

Driving .............................................................. P428

Tires ....................................................... P431, P502

Wiper and washer .................................................. P244

Wiper deicer .......................................................... P276

X-MODE................................................................ P373

Indicator............................................................ P194

Index

565

Index

(568,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(569,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(570,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(571,1)

北米Model "A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 26

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6

Right Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(2,1)

北米Model"A3250BE-B" EDITED: 2023/ 12/ 25

GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA

& Fuel

S99AA01

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90

RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane rating

S99AA02

! RON

S99AA0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

! AKI

S99AA0202

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

& Limit of ethanol content

S99AA09

No more than 15%

& Fuel tank capacity

S99AA03

19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)

& Engine oil

S99AA04

Use only the following oils.

. API classification SP with the words “RESOURCE CON-

SERVING”

. or ILSAC GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”

�P527.

& Engine oil capacity

S99AA05

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.

After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked

using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance

and service, refer to “Engine oil” �P492.

& Cold tire pressure

S99AA06

Refer to “Tires” �P530.

Subaru 2024 Ascent Limited 8‑Passenger

Product's Documents

Owner's Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2024 ASCENT LIMITED 8‑PASSENGER Questions and Answers